306
iTEVA Software Manual Operators Manual 8499 400 30001 190809 © 2009 Thermo Fisher Scientific. All rights reserved. SOLAAR House, 19 Mercers Row, Cambridge CB5 8BZ.United Kingdom. Telephone +44 (0) 1223 347400, Fax +44 (0) 1223 347402. www.thermofisher.com

iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    89

  • Download
    10

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

iTEVA Software ManualOperators Manual

8499 400 30001

190809

© 2009 Thermo Fisher Scientific. All rights reserved. SOLAAR House, 19 Mercers Row, Cambridge CB5 8BZ.United Kingdom. Telephone +44 (0) 1223 347400, Fax +44 (0) 1223 347402.www.thermofisher.com

Page 2: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo ScientificiTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 3: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual i

Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................................. 1-1 iTEVA Security ..................... ......................................................1-3 Opening the Program ..................................................................1-5 ITEVA Security Login ........................................................................1-5 Conventions ................................................................................1-6

Chapter 2 iTEVA Control Center ................................................................................. 2-1 iTEVA Control Center ......................................................................2-3 The Menu Bar .............................................................................2-4 File ..............................................................................................2-4 File, Log On ................................................................................2-4 File, Log Off ................................................................................2-4 File, Print Journal ........................................................................2-5 File, Journal Print Preview ...........................................................2-5 File, Print Setup ..........................................................................2-5 File, Page Setup ...........................................................................2-5 File, Exit ......................................................................................2-6 View ..............................................................................................2-6 Tools, Options ..................................................................................2-6 Tools, Options, General ..............................................................2-7 Tools, Options, Periodic Table .....................................................2-7 Tools, Options, Journal ...............................................................2-8 Tools, Options, Directories .......................................................2-10 Tools, Options, Print Options ...................................................2-11 Tools, Options, Analyst .............................................................2-12 iTEVA Security ..................... ....................................................2-12 Tools, Options, New Method Parameters ..................................2-12 Tools/Options/Access Rights - only for iTEVA Security .............2-13 iTEVA SQL Databases ..............................................................2-17 iTEVA Security ..................... ....................................................2-17 Tools, Options, Application Database .......................................2-18 Database Wizard .............................................................................2-18 Database Info ............................................................................2-20 Create .......................................................................................2-20 Detach ......................................................................................2-20 Attach .......................................................................................2-20 Backup ......................................................................................2-21 Restore ......................................................................................2-21 Users (only for iTEVA, not present for iTEVA Security) ............2-21 Create New Database ................................................................2-21 Add a New Connection .............................................................2-23 Copy Methods/Results ..............................................................2-25 Change Active Connection ........................................................2-25

Page 4: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificii iTEVA Software Manual

Deleting/Exporting/Importing Databases ........................................2-25 Deleting a Database ........................................................................2-25 Editing/Deleting a Connection .................................................2-26 Exporting/Importing a Database from/to another iCAP ...........2-26 Database Upgrades ....................................................................2-26 Tools, Instrument Options ..............................................................2-27 Autosampler ..............................................................................2-27 Sample Introduction .................................................................2-27 Enable Drain Sensor ..................................................................2-28 Accessory ...................................................................................2-28 Help ............................................................................................2-28 Help, Help Topics .....................................................................2-28 Feature request / Incident form .................................................2-28 Help, About iTEVA ..................................................................2-30 The Tool Bar....................................................................................2-31 The Workspace ..........................................................................2-31 The Journal ...............................................................................2-32 The Status Bar ...........................................................................2-33 New Firmware dialog box ..........................................................2-34 Chapter 3 Analyst ......................................................................................................... 3-1 Analyst Window ................................................................................3-3

Chapter 4 Analyst, Method ......................................................................................... 4-1 Analyst, Method ................................................................................4-3 Method Menu Bar.......................................................................4-3 Method .......................................................................................4-3 Create a new Method ........................................................................4-4 Periodic Table, Map Editor ..............................................................4-10 Status ............................................................................................4-12 Analysis Preferences .........................................................................4-13 Sample Options ........................................................................4-14 Source .......................................................................................4-14 Analysis Maximum Integration Times .......................................4-15 Calibration Mode ............................................................................4-16 Trailing Fullframe Options ..............................................................4-18 Automated Output ..........................................................................4-21 Automated Output, Unknowns .................................................4-21 Automated Output, Standards ..................................................4-23 Report Preferences ...........................................................................4-24 Report Preferences, Unknowns ..................................................4-24 Checks. ...........................................................................................4-28 Check Type, QC .......................................................................4-31 Check Type, Recovery ...............................................................4-33 Check Type, Limit Check ..........................................................4-34 Check Type, Duplicate ..............................................................4-35 Sequence Automation .....................................................................4-35 Initial Actions ............................................................................4-37

Contents

Page 5: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual iii

Continuing Actions ...................................................................4-38 End Actions ..............................................................................4-40 Global QC Properties ......................................................................4-40 Continuing Actions, Failure options ................................................4-42 Autosampler ....................................................................................4-42 Source Settings ................................................................................4-45 Internal Standards ...........................................................................4-50 Selecting Internal Standards ......................................................4-51 Standards ..................................................................................4-53 Elements .........................................................................................4-56 Elements, General .....................................................................4-57 Elements, Standards ..................................................................4-60 Elements, Fit .............................................................................4-63 Elements, IEC ...........................................................................4-75 Elements, Subarray ....................................................................4-77 Method Reports ..............................................................................4-80 Method, Open ..........................................................................4-81 iTEVA Security ................................................................................4-85 Select a Method, Sign and Audit Trail .............................................4-85 iTEVA Security ................................................................................4-89 Method, Sign Method .....................................................................4-89 Method, Audit Trail ..................................................................4-90 Toolbar ............................................................................................4-90 Tools ............................................................................................4-92 View ............................................................................................4-94 Help ............................................................................................4-95

Chapter 5 Analyst, Analysis ....................................................................................... 5-1 Analyst, Analysis................................................................................5-3 Tool Bar ......................................................................................5-3 Method .......................................................................................5-6 iTEVA Security .................................................................................5-7 Run ..............................................................................................5-8 Run Full Frame ...........................................................................5-8 Time Scan .................................................................................5-16 Run, Unknown, QC, Standard, Blank.............................................5-22 Calibration ................................................................................5-27 Active Method, Workspace ..............................................................5-30 Results ............................................................................................5-43 Instrument ......................................................................................5-54 Tools ............................................................................................5-60 View ............................................................................................5-67 Help ............................................................................................5-69

Chapter 6 Analyst, Sequence ..................................................................................... 6-1 Analyst, Sequence ..............................................................................6-3 Sequence Menu Bar .....................................................................6-3

Contents

Page 6: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificiv iTEVA Software Manual

Auto Session ................................................................................6-4 Auto-Session,New Autosampler ...................................................6-4 Auto-Session, New Manual .........................................................6-7 Run Auto-Session ......................................................................6-10 Autosampler Error messages ......................................................6-11 Signing Autosessions and Autosession Audit Trail ............................6-13 Sequence .........................................................................................6-14 Sequence Tool Bar .....................................................................6-16 Autosession functions ......................................................................6-17 Manipulating Auto Sessions ......................................................6-25

Chapter 7 Publisher ..................................................................................................... 7-1 Publisher ...........................................................................................7-3 To create a New Report .....................................................................7-3 Tools ...........................................................................................7-7 Report Tool Bar ..........................................................................7-8 Flexible Report by Sample ...........................................................7-9 Horizontal Table Report............................................................7-11 Intensity Report ........................................................................7-11 Method Detection Limit ...........................................................7-11 QC Trend Chart .......................................................................7-12 RSD Trend Chart ......................................................................7-13 Sample Report .................................................................................7-14 Simple Sample Report .....................................................................7-14 Trend Chart ....................................................................................7-15 Vertical Table Report .......................................................................7-15

Chapter 8 iTEVA Security ............................................................................................ 8-1 Introduction ......................................................................................8-1 Background .......................................................................................8-3 What is 21 CFR Part 11? ...........................................................8-3 Access Control ............................................................................8-3 User Login and Authentication ...................................................8-3 Electronic Records .......................................................................8-4 Electronic Signatures ..................................................................8-4 Audit Trails ..................................................................................8-4 Event Log ....................................................................................8-4 Access Control ..................................................................................8-5 Granting Access Rights ......................................................................8-7 Viewing the current User’s Access Rights ...........................................8-7 User Login and Authentication ...................................................8-8 iTEVA Security Login Process ......................................................8-8 Electronic Records .......................................................................8-9 Electronic Signatures ...................................................................8-9 Audit Trails ......................................................................................8-13 Event Logs ......................................................................................8-15 Information Events....................................................................8-16 Deleted Samples, Methods and Autosessions .............................8-16

Contents

Page 7: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual v

Signing Samples and Sample Audit Trails ........................................8-17 Signing Methods and Method Audit Trail .......................................8-19 Signing Autosessions and Autosession Audit Trail ............................8-20

Contents

Page 8: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificvi

This page is intentionally blank.

Contents

Page 9: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii

Figure 1-1. iTEVA login .............................................................1-5Figure 1-2. iTEVA Security login ................................................1-5

Figure 2-1. The iTEVA Control Center window .........................2-3Figure 2-2. The Menu Bar ..........................................................2-4Figure 2-3. The File Menu ..........................................................2-4Figure 2-4. Page Setup Dialog Box ..............................................2-5Figure 2-5. View Menu ...............................................................2-6Figure 2-6. Tools Menu ..............................................................2-6Figure 2-7. Tools, Options, General ............................................2-7Figure 2-8. Tools, Options, Periodic Table ..................................2-8Figure 2-9. Tools, Options, Journal ............................................2-9Figure 2-10. Tools, Options, Directories .....................................2-10Figure 2-11. Tools, Options, Print Options ................................2-12Figure 2-12. Tools, Options, Print Options, Header/Footer .......2-12Figure 2-13. Tools, Options, Analyst ..........................................2-13Figure 2-14. Tools, Options, New Method Parameters ...............2-14Figure 2-15. Security Administration program, Access Control ...2-15Figure 2-16. Tools, Options, Access Rights .................................2-16Figure 2-17. Tools, Options, Application Database .....................2-18Figure 2-18. iTEVA Database Wizard for standard (above) and iTEVA Security (below) ........................2-19Figure 2-19. Database Wizard .....................................................2-22Figure 2-20. Database Wizard for iTEVA Security .......................2-22Figure 2-21. Add a connection icon ............................................2-23Figure 2-22. Data Link dialog box ..............................................2-23Figure 2-23. Data link dialog box for iTEVA Security .................2-24Figure 2-24. Data link file name dialog box ................................2-25Figure 2-25. Change the Active Connection dropdown menu ....2-25Figure 2-26. Edit/Add/Delete a connection icons .......................2-26Figure 2-27. Database Upgrade dialog box ..................................2-26Figure 2-28. Tools, Instrument Options, Autosampler ................2-27Figure 2-29. Tools, Instrument Options, Sample Introduction ...2-27Figure 2-30. The Help Menu ......................................................2-28Figure 2-31. The Help Feature Request Incident Form ...............2-29Figure 2-32. About iTEVA .........................................................2-30Figure 2-33. The Tool Bar ...........................................................2-31Figure 2-34. Journal window ......................................................2-32Figure 2-35. Status Bar ...............................................................2-33Figure 2-36. New Firmware Window..........................................2-34

Figures

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Page 10: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificviii iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 3-1. Analyst - Analysis, Method, Sequence .......................3-3

Figure 4-1. Method Menu Bar ....................................................4-3Figure 4-2. Method Menu ..........................................................4-3Figure 4-3. iCAP 6200 Method Template ...................................4-4Figure 4-4. Method Workspace ...................................................4-5Figure 4-5. Method, Periodic Table .............................................4-6Figure 4-6. Method, Periodic Table, Cursor information for specific element ........................................................4-6Figure 4-7. Method, Periodic Table, Line List display .................4-7Figure 4-8. Method, Periodic Table, Line List/Interferences Window ...................................................................4-7Figure 4-9. Method, Periodic Table, Selected element displayed in aqua ..............................................4-8Figure 4-10. Method, Periodic Table, Selected Line marked with asterisk .....................................................4-8Figure 4-11. Method, Status Window ...........................................4-9Figure 4-12. Periodic Table, Map Editor .....................................4-10Figure 4-13. Periodic Table, Right mouse click, Edit Map, Add Lines .......................................................4-11Figure 4-14. Periodic Table, Right mouse click, Add Lines, Create .............................................................4-11Figure 4-15. Method Workspace, Status .....................................4-12Figure 4-16. Status Window .......................................................4-12Figure 4-17. Method, Analysis Preferences ..................................4-13Figure 4-18. Analysis Preferences ................................................4-13Figure 4-19. Analysis Preferences, Sample Options .....................4-14Figure 4-20. Analysis Preferences, Source ....................................4-15Figure 4-21. Analysis Preferences, Maximum Integration Times .4-16Figure 4-22. Analysis Preferences, Calibration Mode ..................4-16Figure 4-23. Analysis Preferences, Trailing Fullframe Options .....4-18Figure 4-24. Method, Automated Output ..................................4-20Figure 4-25. Method, Automated Output dialog ........................4-21Figure 4-26. Method, Automated Output, Standards .................4-23Figure 4-27. Method, Automated Output, Standards .................4-23Figure 4-28. Method, Report Preferences ....................................4-24Figure 4-29. Report Preferences, Unknowns ...............................4-24Figure 4-30. Report Preferences, Unknowns, Output and Default View ...................................................4-25Figure 4-31. Report Preferences, Unknowns, In Concentration Output Mode, apply ...........4-25Figure 4-32. Report Preferences, Unknowns, Calculate Correction Factor. ..........................................4-26Figure 4-33. Report Preferences, Unknowns, Screen Report, Print Report and Exported Report ...........................4-27Figure 4-34. Method, Checks .....................................................4-28Figure 4-35. Checks Window .....................................................4-28Figure 4-36. Checks, New Check Table Dialog Box ....................4-29Figure 4-37. Checks Window .....................................................4-30

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Figures

Page 11: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual ix

Figure 4-38. Checks, QC Check Type ........................................4-31Figure 4-39. Checks, Range Units ..............................................4-31Figure 4-40. Checks, Standard Normalization type .....................4-32Figure 4-41. Checks Window .....................................................4-33Figure 4-42. Check Type, Recovery ............................................4-33Figure 4-43. Check Type, Limit Check .......................................4-34Figure 4-44. Check Type, Duplicate ...........................................4-35Figure 4-45. The Method Workspace, Sequence Automation ......4-35Figure 4-46. Sequence Automation .............................................4-36Figure 4-47. Method, Sequence Automation, Initial Actions ......4-37Figure 4-48. Method, Sequence Automation, Continuing Actions ........................................4-38Figure 4-49. Method, Sequence Automation, End Actions .........4-40Figure 4-50. Method, Sequence Automation, Global QC Properties .....................................4-41Figure 4-51. Method, Sequence Automation, Autosampler Options ......................................4-42Figure 4-52. Method, Sequence Automation, Check table for Intelligent Rinse ..............................................4-43Figure 4-53. Method, Source Settings .........................................4-45Figure 4-54. Method, Source Settings .........................................4-46Figure 4-55. Method, Source Settings, Radial Viewing Height ..4-47Figure 4-56. Method, Source Settings, Additional Gas Flow ......4-48Figure 4-57. Method, Source Settings, Laser Sample Introduction .......................................4-48Figure 4-58. Method, Source Settings, SSEA Sample Introduction .......................................4-50Figure 4-59. Method, Internal Standards ....................................4-50Figure 4-60. Method, Internal Standards, Periodic Table Selection ................................................4-51Figure 4-61. Method, Change Elements .....................................4-51Figure 4-62. Method, Internal Standards Selection .....................4-52Figure 4-63. Method, Standards .................................................4-53Figure 4-64. Method, Standards Window ...................................4-54Figure 4-65. Method, Standards, New Standard Dialog Box .......4-54Figure 4-66. MSA Calibration ....................................................4-55Figure 4-67. Method, Elements ..................................................4-56Figure 4-68. Method, Elements ..................................................4-57Figure 4-69. Method, Elements, General ....................................4-57Figure 4-70. Elements, General, Result Labelling........................4-58Figure 4-71. Method, Elements, General, Timing .......................4-58Figure 4-72. Method, Elements, General, Referenced Internal .......... Standards ........................................................4-59Figure 4-73. Method, Elements, General, Analytical Report .......4-59Figure 4-74. Method, Elements, Standards .................................4-61Figure 4-75. Method, Elements, Standards table .........................4-62Figure 4-76. Method, Elements, Standards, Re-Slope Standards ........................................................4-62Figure 4-77. Method, Elements, Fit ............................................4-63

Figures

Page 12: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificx iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 4-78. Method, Elements, Fit, Line Switch and Print Limits.....................................................4-65Figure 4-79. Method, Elements, Standards, Line Switching Arrows ............................................4-66Figure 4-80. Method, Elements, Standards, Line Switching for Ca .............................................4-66Figure 4-81. Method, Setting Print Limits ..................................4-67Figure 4-82. Use MSA- Blank subtraction ..................................4-68Figure 4-83. Method, Element, Fit, Advanced Options ..............4-68Figure 4-84. Method, Elements, Fit, Details ...............................4-70Figure 4-85. Method, Elements, Fit, Std Table ............................4-72Figure 4-86. Method, Elements, Fit, Right mouse click ..............4-73Figure 4-87. Method, Elements, Fit, Calibration Plot Commands, Print (Right mouse click) ............4-74Figure 4-88. Method, Elements, IEC ..........................................4-75Figure 4-89. Method, Elements, Subarray ...................................4-78Figure 4-90. Right mouse click on Subarray Plot ........................4-79Figure 4-91. Method, Method Reports .......................................4-80Figure 4-92. Method, Method Reports, Common Report ..........4-80Figure 4-93. Method, Open ........................................................4-81Figure 4-94. Method Open, Select a Method Dialog Box ...........4-82Figure 4-95. Method Query........................................................4-82Figure 4-96. Method Query, Click Ellipsis ..................................4-83Figure 4-97. Method Open, Select a Method Dialog Box - Show All Revisions ..........................................4-83Figure 4-98. Select a Method, Copy To, Select a Destination Database dialog box ........................................4-84Figure 4-99. Method Open, iTEVA Window after Method is opened ...........................................4-84Figure 4-100. Method Open, Select a Method Dialog Box for iTEVA Security ................................................4-85Figure 4-101. Method Open, Sign a Method Dialog Box for iTEVA Security ........................................4-85Figure 4-102. Method Open, Audit Trail for iTEVA Security .......4-86Figure 4-103. Method, Close ........................................................4-86Figure 4-104. Method, Save a Method Dialog Box .......................4-87Figure 4-105. Method, Print Dialog Box ......................................4-88Figure 4-106. Method Menu for iTEVA Security ..........................4-89Figure 4-107. Method, Sign Method ............................................4-89Figure 4-108. Method, Audit Trail ................................................4-90Figure 4-109. Method, Tool Bar ...................................................4-90Figure 4-110. Method Tool Bar ....................................................4-90Figure 4-111. Tools Menu ............................................................4-92Figure 4-112. Tools, Options, Change Element Display Order .....4-92Figure 4-113. Tools, Options, New Method Parameters ...............4-93

Figures

Page 13: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual xi

Figure 4-114. Help Menu .............................................................4-95Figure 4-115. Help, About Analyst ...............................................4-95

Figure 5-1. Analysis Menu Bar ....................................................5-3Figure 5-2. Method Tool Bar ......................................................5-3Figure 5-3. View, Subarray Plot with multiple samples displayed 5-5Figure 5-4. Method Menu ..........................................................5-6Figure 5-5. Method Menu for iTEVA Security ............................5-7Figure 5-6. Method, Sign Method ..............................................5-7Figure 5-7. Method, Audit Trail ..................................................5-8Figure 5-8. Run Menu ................................................................5-8Figure 5-9. Run, Run Fullframe ..................................................5-9Figure 5-10. Run, Run Fullframe, Sample ID Information ...........5-9Figure 5-11. Run, Run Fullframe, Automated Output ................5-10Figure 5-12. Run, Run Fullframe, Options .................................5-10Figure 5-13. Low Wavelength Fullframe Image ...........................5-11Figure 5-14. High Wavelength Fullframe Image .........................5-12Figure 5-15. Fullframe Tool Bar ..................................................5-12Figure 5-16. 2d Plot of Fullframe Image Region .........................5-14Figure 5-17. Line Information ....................................................5-14Figure 5-18. Analytical Element List ...........................................5-15Figure 5-19. Line List for Elements in the Method .....................5-15Figure 5-20. Fullframe Menu ......................................................5-15Figure 5-21. Run, Run Time Scan ..............................................5-16Figure 5-22. Run, Run Time Scan, Sample ID Information........5-16Figure 5-23. Run, Run Time Scan, Automated Output ..............5-17Figure 5-24. Run, Run Time Scan, Acquisition Parameters .........5-17Figure 5-25. Run, Run Time Scan Options ................................5-18Figure 5-26. Run, Run Time Scan, Select Lines ..........................5-18Figure 5-27. Time Scan data being acquired ...............................5-19Figure 5-28. Run, Time Scan, (Right mouse click) .....................5-20Figure 5-29. Time Scan data shown as first derivative .................5-21Figure 5-30. Time Scan data with defined Gate values ................5-21Figure 5-31. Run, Run Unknown ...............................................5-22Figure 5-32. Run, Run Unknown, Sample ID Information ........5-22Figure 5-33. Run, Run Unknown, Automated Output ...............5-23Figure 5-34. Run, Run Unknown, Output mode: CONC ..........5-23Figure 5-36. Run, Run Button ....................................................5-24Figure 5-35. Run, Run Unknown, Preferences ............................5-24Figure 5-37. MSA button ...........................................................5-25Figure 5-38. Run, Select Lines Button ........................................5-25Figure 5-39. Run, Run Unknown, Select Lines ..........................5-26Figure 5-40. Run .......................................................................5-26Figure 5-41. Run, Run Calibration .............................................5-27Figure 5-42. Run, Calibration, Select Lines ................................5-29Figure 5-43. Run, Start Continuous Run ....................................5-30Figure 5-44. Method, Right mouse click .....................................5-31Figure 5-45. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Export All Samples ...........................................................5-32

Figures

Chapter 5

Page 14: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificxii iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 5-46. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Edit Report Option .......................................5-32Figure 5-47. Method Workspace, Right mouse click menu for iTEVA Security .........................................5-33Figure 5-48. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Sign Method dialog box .................................5-33Figure 5-49. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Method Audit Trail ........................................5-34Figure 5-50. Method Workspace, Right mouse click on samples .....................................................5-34Figure 5-51. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Sample Identification .....................................5-35Figure 5-52. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Recalculate Sample .........................................5-35Figure 5-53. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Export Sample ................................................5-36Figure 5-54. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Change Sample Type .....................................5-36Figure 5-55. Method Workspace, Right mouse click menu for iTEVA Security .........................................5-37Figure 5-56. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Sign Sample ....................................................5-37Figure 5-57. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Audit Trail .......................................................5-37Figure 5-58. Method Workspace, Right mouse click on Fullframe ...................................................5-38Figure 5-59. Subtract Fullframe ..................................................5-39Figure 5-60. Select the filename for subtraction ..........................5-39Figure 5-61. Select filename for further subtraction ....................5-40Figure 5-62. Resultant-2, Fullframe image ..................................5-40Figure 5-63. Fullframe, Right mouse click, Produce Sample dialog box .............................5-41Figure 5-64. Fullframe, Right mouse click menu for iTEVA Security ...............................................5-41Figure 5-65. Fullframe, Right mouse click, Sign Sample .............5-42Figure 5-66. Fullframe, Right mouse, Audit Trail ........................5-42Figure 5-67. Results Menu ..........................................................5-43Figure 5-68. Results, Typical Screen Report ................................5-43Figure 5-69. Results, Print ..........................................................5-45Figure 5-70. Results, Open .........................................................5-45Figure 5-71. Results, Open, More button ...................................5-46Figure 5-72. Results, Open, Sample Browser ..............................5-47Figure 5-73. Results, Save ...........................................................5-47Figure 5-74. Results, Export Results ...........................................5-48Figure 5-75. Results, Open Sequence ..........................................5-49Figure 5-76. Results, Delete Repeat ............................................5-49Figure 5-77. Results, Run Recovery ............................................5-50Figure 5-78. Results, Run Recovery, Analytical Report - Recovery Check ............................................5-51Figure 5-79. Results, Run Duplicate ...........................................5-51

Figures

Page 15: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual xiii

Figure 5-80. Results, Run Duplicate, Analytical Report - Duplicate Check ...........................................5-52Figure 5-81. Select/Deselect Lines ..............................................5-52Figure 5-82. Results, QC Actions ...............................................5-53Figure 5-83. Results, QC Actions, Autocalc IECs .......................5-53Figure 5-84. Calculated KI IEC factor displayed in Method, Elements, IECs ..............................................5-54Figure 5-85. Instrument Menu ...................................................5-54Figure 5-86. Instrument, ICP Control Panel ...............................5-55Figure 5-87. Instrument, ICP Control Panel and Instrument Status ............................................5-55Figure 5-88. Instrument, Perform Auto Peak ..............................5-57Figure 5-89. Auto Peak Warning dialog box ................................5-58Figure 5-90. Instrument, Torch Alignment .................................5-59Figure 5-91. Instrument, Optimise Source ..................................5-59Figure 5-92. Tools Menu ............................................................5-60Figure 5-93. Tools, Example of a Wavelength Line Library .........5-61Figure 5-94. Tools, Line Library, Right-click...............................5-62Figure 5-96. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data ................................5-63Figure 5-97. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, Sample Browser ......5-64Figure 5-98. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, insert media window ................................................5-64Figure 5-99. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, Select Drive and Volume Label .................................5-65Figure 5-100. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, finish ......................5-65Figure 5-101. Tools, Options ........................................................5-66Figure 5-102. View Menu .............................................................5-67Figure 5-103. View, Single Sample view ........................................5-67Figure 5-104. View, Multiple Sample Presentation .......................5-68Figure 5-105. Help, About Analyst ...............................................5-69Figure 5-106. View, Subarray Plot with multiple samples displayed ............................................5-70

Figure 6-1. Sequence Menu Bar ..................................................6-3Figure 6-2. Auto-Session Menu...................................................6-4Figure 6-3. Auto-Session, New Autosampler ...............................6-4Figure 6-4. Auto-Session, New Autosampler dialog box ..............6-5Figure 6-5. New Autosampler, New Sequence dialog box............6-5Figure 6-6. Auto Session, New Autosampler dialog box ..............6-6Figure 6-7. Auto-session Menu ...................................................6-7Figure 6-9. Auto-Session, New Manual prompt ..........................6-8Figure 6-8. Auto-Session, New Manual Dialog box ....................6-8Figure 6-10. The iTEVA Window Sequence Tab .........................6-10Figure 6-11. Sample List .............................................................6-11Figure 6-12. Auto-Session menu for iTEVA Security ...................6-13Figure 6-14. Auto-Session, Audit Trail ........................................6-14Figure 6-13. Auto-Session, Sign ..................................................6-14Figure 6-15. Sequence Menu ......................................................6-14

Chapter 6

Figures

Page 16: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificxiv iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 6-16. Sequence, Add ........................................................6-15Figure 6-17. Sequence, New Sequence ........................................6-15Figure 6-18. Sequence, Remove ................................................6-16Figure 6-19. The Sequence Tool Bar ...........................................6-16Figure 6-20. Halt Auto-Session dialog box ..................................6-17Figure 6-21. Assigning Sample Positions (Right mouse click) .....6-18Figure 6-22. Auto-Locate Sample Positions .................................6-19Figure 6-23. Unlocate, Right mouse click ...................................6-20Figure 6-24. Sample U:1 position empty ....................................6-20Figure 6-25. Sample relocated to position 42 ..............................6-21Figure 6-26. Sample List showing relocation of sample position 42. .........................................6-21Figure 6-27. The Add Samples Dialog Box .................................6-22Figure 6-28. Sample List .............................................................6-22Figure 6-29. Sample List, Calculate Correction Factor ................6-23Figure 6-30. Import Warning Dialog Box ...................................6-25

Figure 7-1. The Publisher Window .............................................7-3Figure 7-2. Report/New file menu ..............................................7-3Figure 7-3. Report/New dialog box .............................................7-4Figure 7-4. Publisher, Sample Browser dialog box .......................7-4Figure 7-5. Report Customization ..............................................7-5Figure 7-6. Report Explorer ........................................................7-5Figure 7-7. Report Menu ............................................................7-6Figure 7-8. Export Options .......................................................7-6Figure 7-9. Tools Menu ..............................................................7-7Figure 7-10. Tool Bar....................................................................7-7Figure 7-11. Report Customization Tab .......................................7-9Figure 7-12. Method Data tab ...................................................7-10Figure 7-13. Result Data Tab ......................................................7-10Figure 7-14. Horizontal Table Report .........................................7-11Figure 7-15. Intensity Report ......................................................7-11Figure 7-16. Report Customization for MDL report ..................7-11Figure 7-17. Method Detection Limit Report .............................7-12Figure 7-18. QC Trend Chart .....................................................7-12Figure 7-19. RSD Trend Chart ...................................................7-13Figure 7-20. Sample Report ........................................................7-14Figure 7-21. Simple Sample Report ............................................7-14Figure 7-22. Trend Chart ............................................................7-15Figure 7-23. Vertical Table Report ..............................................7-15

Figure 8-1. iTEVA Access Control Window ...............................8-5Figure 8-2. iTEVA Access Rights Window ..................................8-7Figure 8-3. New Users Window ................................................8-10Figure 8-4. Default Signatures ..................................................8-10Figure 8-5. Sign Sample Window .............................................8-12Figure 8-6. Sign Method Window ............................................8-12

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Figures

Page 17: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual xv

Figures

Figure 8-7. Sign Autosession Window .....................................8-13Figure 8-8. Audit Trail Window ................................................8-13Figure 8-9. Event Viewer Window ............................................8-15Figure 8-10. Event Properties Window .......................................8-15Figure 8-11. Security Administration Window ...........................8-16Figure 8-12. Sign Sample Window .............................................8-17Figure 8-13. Sign Audit Trail Window ........................................8-18Figure 8-14. Sign Method Window ............................................8-19Figure 8-15. Sign Method, Audit Trail Window ..........................8-19Figure 8-16. Auto-Session menu for iTEVA Security ...................8-20Figure 8-17. Auto-Session, Sign ..................................................8-20Figure 8-18. Auto-Session, Audit Trail ........................................8-21

Page 18: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientificxvi

This page is intentionally blank.

Figures

Page 19: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 1 - 1

Chapter 1 Introduction

iTEVA is a powerful and flexible Windows®- based application that is used to acquire, process, store and report analytical data from Thermo Scientific’s iCAP ICP spectrometers.

This manual describes the features of the program and explains how the analyst can generate analytical methods and data processing routines to determine the concentration of elements in complex samples. The program includes a broad variety of features to allow the analyst to configure methods and sequences to obtain manual and automated analytical results.

Page 20: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific1 - 2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Introduction

Page 21: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 1 - 3

iTEVA Security is a separate iTEVA software package designed with FDA, title 21 of the Code of Federal Regulations, part 11 (21 CFR, 11 pertains to electronic records and electronic signatures) in mind and is thus constructed to keep visible audit trails of all actions that occur within iTEVA and impact data integrity. Whilst the vast majority of iTEVA Security uses the same functionality as iTEVA, where it is different, the iTEVA Security settings will be indicated at the end of the page, or on a stand alone page where applicable.

IntroductioniTEVA Security

iTEVA Security

Page 22: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific1 - 4 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Introduction

Page 23: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 1 - 5

To open iTEVA:

1. Click on the iTEVA control center icon on the Windows desktop to present the iTEVA login dialog box.

Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

2. Enter your User name in the dialog box, or select it from the list, and click OK to start iTEVA Control Center.To Add a new User to iTEVA, simply type in the name and it will be stored.

The Remove User button is used to delete analyst logins from the system, select the user you wish to delete from the User Name dropdown list. A prompt will appear to confirm this deletion.

iTEVA Security requires a user name and password to gain access, according to 21 CFR, 11.200(a)(1) that user identification should:

Employ at least two distinct identification components such as an identification code and password

Figure 1-2. iTEVA Security login

Opening the Program

ITEVA Security Login

IntroductionOpening the Program

Page 24: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific1 - 6 iTEVA Software Manual

This is the same user name and password that is used to log onto Windows. New users are added using windows user manager, they are then granted access rights to iTEVA in the Security Administration program.

After logging in, the iTEVA Control Center window will open. This is used to setup the instrument, the application database, the default method values, plasma ignition settings, etc.

It is used to access:

● The Analyst window for data acquisition.

● The Publisher window for report generation.

● The Journal (a listing of major activities).

● The Plasma and interlock icons for instrument settings.

This dialog is also shown when logging in after having logged out with the File/ Log Off / Log On menu item.

In general, iTEVA follows the general conventions of Microsoft WindowsTM and it is expected that the analyst has a good understanding of this operating system.For the sake of brevity:

1. We will not describe functions and commands that are common to Windows application programs (unless the command leads to an operation that is unique to iTEVA).

2. It is assumed that buttons such as OK and Apply are to be selected when the analyst has completed the selection of the options in a dialog box or window, so we will not mention the use of these buttons. Similarly, the Cancel button closes a dialog box or window and erases any data entry or alteration.

3. In many cases, there are two or more acceptable ways to perform a task, access a window, etc. As an example, you can access the list of methods by selecting Open on the Method menu of the iTEVA Analyst window or by selecting Ctrl + O keys simultaneously. When two (or more) options are available, we will only indicate one.

Note: Menus provide dropdown lists of appropriate operations available in each application. Often-used operations may also be provided on the tool bar. Clicking on a menu item produces the dropdown list. Clicking on a highlighted option selects it.

Note: The Tool bar and Menu bar can be relocated by depressing the LEFT mouse button when the cursor is on the double vertical bar at the left of each tool bar. With the mouse button depressed, move the cursor to the desired location and release the button to deposit.

Conventions

IntroductionConventions

Page 25: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-1

Chapter 2 iTEVA Control Center

Page 26: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

iTEVA Control Center

Page 27: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-3

The general, day-to-day operation of iTEVA involves the use of two main options : Analyst and Publisher. When the program is opened, the iTEVA Control Center is displayed. This window gives access to:

● Analyst window: Used to develop methods, analyze samples and set up the auto sampler. The Analyst window is accessed via the Analyst icon in the Control Center workspace.

● Publisher window: Used to generate analytical reports using analyst selected formats. The Publisher window is accessed via the Publisher icon in the Control Center workspace.

iTEVA Control Center

The iTEVA Control Center window consists of:

● Menu Bar - Accesses general System commands, such as default values for methods, application database, periodic table, journal, etc.

● Tool Bar - Provides shortcuts to commonly used commands.

● Workspace - Icons to open Analyst and Publisher windows. It provides access to the various applications and navigation tools within an application.

● Journal - Listing of major activities of the system, for review or printing. The journal parameters are set in Tools, Options, Journal.

Figure 2-1. The iTEVA Control Center window

iTEVA Control Center

Page 28: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-4 iTEVA Software Manual

● Status Bar - Indicates the status of the system and provides brief information about a command when the cursor is placed over it. The status bar provides detail on the current operation selected and instrument conditions such as plasma, interlocks, autosampler and communications.

The menu bar accesses functions that are active when the Control Center window is open.

iTEVA Software ManualThe Menu Bar

The Menu Bar

Figure 2-2. The Menu Bar

The File menu is used to log an analyst on or off and to edit parameters that relate to the journal.

File

Figure 2-3. The File Menu

The Log On command on the File menu allows an individual to access the system by presenting the iTEVA Login dialog box which is used to enter the analyst name. For iTEVA Security, a valid username and password is required. If the system is being used when the Log On command is selected, the present analyst’s authority will be terminated.

The use of the system by an active analyst can be ended via the Log Off command on the File menu (e.g. if another analyst wanted to use the system). When an analyst is logged off, the present instrument conditions are maintained (if an Autosession is running, it will continue - for iTEVA Security, the last authorised user will be logged against the session) and the User Name dialog box will be presented to allow a new analyst to Log On.

Note: All instances of Logging On/Off are recorded in the Journal. ▲

The Log Off command removes the permission of the present analyst to access the system. The Log On command will remain active so that some other analyst can access the system. The Log Off selection is enabled only when a valid analyst is currently logged on.The File menu includes a number of commands for the Journal:

File, Log On

File, Log Off

Page 29: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-5

iTEVA Software ManualThe Menu Bar

Print Journal - Presents a dialog box to set printer parameters (standard Windows printer dialog box for the printer).

Journal Print Preview - Presents the journal in the format in which it will be printed.

Print Setup - Presents a dialog box to set printer parameters (standard Windows printer dialog box, which is dependent on the printer).

The general format of the journal can be established via the Page Setup dialog box, which can be accessed via the File menu.

File, Print Journal

File, Journal Print Preview

File, Print Setup

File, Page Setup

Figure 2-4. Page Setup Dialog Box

The dialog box provides margin selection for the Journal Table. Checkboxes provide for the selection of titles and gridlines. In addition, journal contents can be printed in black and white only if desired. Should the table exceed the page size the page order can be prioritized on either row or column.

● Margins - (entered in inches) - Define spacing in four directions.

● Preview - Shows the configuration of the finished report. ● Titles and Gridlines - Offers checkboxes for header inclusion,

partition lines and color options. ● Page Order - Panel customizes the report of tables that extend

beyond the page margins. ● Center on Page - Can position the table in the center of either

or both page dimensions.

The table can be centered in vertical and/or horizontal directions

Page 30: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-6 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualFile

automatically. When satisfied with the journal page setup, check the Save settings to profile button to re-use the page format.

Note: When tables exceed the page size, the table dimensions may change from page to page. ▲

There are two ways to exit the iTEVA operating software.

● From the Menu bar, select Exit. Exit appears under File on the Home Page.

● On Home Page select the `X’ button found at the top right corner of the window.

The View menu is used to select the items that should appear on the iTEVA Control Center window.

File, Exit

View

Figure 2-5. View Menu

Each item is a toggle to place or remove the indicated item on the window. A check mark adjacent to Tool Bar or Status Bar indicates that the item is present. The Hide Workspace command is used to remove the workspace. When the workspace has been removed, the command is Show Workspace.

ToolsThe Tools menu is used to access a variety of commands that relate to system operation.

Tools, Options

Figure 2-6. Tools Menu

Options is the main area where the software is customized. There are several Options windows, which are used to enter a variety of instrument-specific parameters and conditions. All of the options are explained in the following pages.

Page 31: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-7

iTEVA Software ManualTools

General - The analyst can enter an instrument name. The software will automatically associate the acquired data with the instrument name in the database.

Tools, Options, General

When the Demonstration Mode, Desktop is selected, the software will run from a remote computer and expects no instrument input. The Instrument Type and View Type will only appear when Desktop mode is selected.

Note: The status bar displays a monitor image when the software is run in desktop mode and an instrument when communicating with the spectrometer. ▲

The Language Translation is analyst selectable to display iTEVA in different languages.

Periodic Table - The color scheme can be set for the symbol name as well as for the Unselected, Selected or Non Selectable status conditions. The interfering elements can be selected to be either Shown or Hidden.

The default Periodic Table colors may be changed globally. Note however, that any changes you make will not be reflected in the on-line help.

Figure 2-7. Tools, Options, General

Tools, Options, Periodic Table

Page 32: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-8 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools

Figure 2-8. Tools, Options, Periodic TablePreview - Shows the selected colors for the three types of element; Unselected, Selected and Non Selectable.

Clicking on the color rectangle right of the element type provides a color palette to chose from.

Interfering elements - Fields with Shown and Hidden IE’s appear. The default is that all interfering elements appear in the Shown IE’s field. However, if the Apply all IE’s checkbox is disabled, element symbols can be transferred to the hidden IE’s field by highlighting the element symbol and clicking the arrows right button. Hiding rare elements simplifies the interfering element list during line selection.

Apply all IE’s - When checkbox is selected, all IE’s (Interfering Elements) are displayed at line selection regardless of Shown/Hidden current status.

Journal - The analyst can select which type of journal messages should be displayed. The journal messages can be selected for display for a range of applications, each of them is analyst selectable. The length of time for the messages to be displayed can be selected as number of days in the history display.

Tools, Options, Journal

Page 33: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-9

iTEVA Software ManualTools

Display Journal Messages for Applications - The Journal options page has check boxes for eight different areas of software. When checkmarks appear in these boxes all journal messages associated with the checked application will appear. The eight specified applications are iTEVA Control Center, Analyst, Sequence, Publisher, Fullframe Imaging, Wavelength Calibration, Diagnostics and Unknown.

Display Journal Message of Type - There are five types of message that are included in the journal when the associated checkbox is marked. They are Error, Alerts, Warning, Information and Debug. Debug is left off as default as this option is only used by Thermo personnel for diagnostics purposes.

History - Authorized users may define the number of days to include in the journal display and to maintain in the journal, and also there is the option to export the journal.

Show Message Description - When checked, a brief statement explaining the message appears in the journal display.

Clear History - Active when the journal contents exceed the limit entered to the left of the button.

Figure 2-9. Tools, Options, Journal

Page 34: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-10 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools

Export - To export the journal (this may be required when logging a service call with Thermo). On clicking Export, the journal is automatically exported as a text file to

C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\Export.

iTEVA uses a number of directories to store its data. If you wish you can change the location this data is stored using this option page:

Tools, Options, Directories

Analytical data: When you create a new database, the files will be stored here. If you archive Fullframes then they will also be put here by default. This directory also stores the files which hold information on the database links listed in the Application Database options page.

Autosampler: This holds the user-editable autosampler .xml files. See the section on editing your own autosampler layouts: Editing Sample Racks and Layouts in Chapter 6.

Export: Any exported files are stored here. Exported samples, methods and journal.

Reports: This holds the report templates used by Publisher.

Figure 2-10. Tools, Options, Directories

Page 35: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-11

iTEVA Software ManualTools

Print Options - Enables the customization of the report. A default company and client name can be entered, which will be printed as a header for each report.

The four additional buttons Journal, Method, Result and Sequence List (this applies to automated sequences using an autosampler) allow the analyst to customize each of these in an individual layout, e.g. the result printout can be set up in a different layout to the method printout. To define any of these text strings, move the cursor to the appropriate field, click to select and type. [see Figure 2-11 overleaf].

Tools, Options, Print Options

Method Templates: A method template is a method saved to a .mtd file and stored in the “Method Templates” folder. To create a method template, run Analyst and open or create a method. Edit as required and choose the Method/Advanced/Export... menu item. Save the method file with whatever filename you wish in the “Method Templates” folder (pathway is indicated in Figure 2-10 for XP and below for Vista). Now when you choose the Method/New menu item you will be presented with the Method Templates dialog instead of the Periodic Table.

Notes for Vista

iTEVA will now run in Windows Vista, changes have been made so that the user running iTEVA does not have to be an Administrator, they can run as a Standard User.

iTEVA must be installed, however, by an administrator. The User Account Control will ask permission to run the setup program.

The location of the iTEVA data folders will be different under vista: The following table shows the folder locations:

Program Files C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA

Read-Only data C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\SysData

Program data C:\ProgramData\iTEVA\SysData

Analytical data C:\Users\Public\iTEVA\AnData

Custom Autosampler files C:\Users\Public\iTEVA\Autosamp Exported files C:\Users\Public\iTEVA\Export

Method Templates C:\ProgramData\iTEVA\Method Templates

Page 36: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-12 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools

Figure 2-11. Tools, Options, Print Options

Figure 2-12. Tools, Options, Print Options, Header/Footer

To customise the print options for any of these four options, click on the required option. The image below will appear which will allow the use of any of the strings to appear left, centre or right aligned. To use multiple strings in the same space, simply manually enter them and separate with a comma i.e. $F, $A.

Page 37: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-13

iTEVA Software ManualTools

Analyst - Allows the analyst to specify parameters that control the behaviour of the Analyst application. Plasma Stabilisation Time is the time (in seconds) that the software will delay after changing plasma parameters, e.g. if the plasma RF power or nebuliser flow is different from one method to the next, then the analyst selected Plasma Stabilisation Time will be employed after this change has taken place.

Min Number of Repeats for Variance Weighting defines the amount of analytical repeats that are required before this is employed, it is analyst selectable between 1 and 9 although 3 is the industry standard.

When Corrected Print Limits is selected, the software reports only the defined print limits (if any) for the method.

Full Frame Gray Scale as Default Display Mode enables either grayscale when selected, or colour if not.

Sample Customer ID Defaults are analyst definable to add labels for additional identification to all samples during analysis.

Note: If an analyst does not have access right “Edit System Settings” granted, then this dialog is read only and not editable. ▲

This will open the New Method Parameters dialog box. These are settings which supply defaults to a method when it is created, and can be adjusted by the analyst.

Plasma parameters - The plasma parameters (Flush Pump Rate, Analysis Pump Rate, RF Power, Nebulizer Gas Flow, Coolant Gas Flow, Auxiliary Gas Flow) can be adjusted from the default values. On Radial iCAPs, the Radial Viewing Height will appear as an option.

iTEVA Security

Tools, Options, New Method Parameters

Figure 2-13. Tools, Options, Analyst

Tools, Options, Analyst

Page 38: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-14 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 2-14. Tools, Options, New Method Parameters

Print Units - Print Units can be specified (typically ppm).

Calibration Conc Weighting Zero Factor, Calibration Var Weighting Zero Factor - Values can be entered.

iTEVA Software ManualTools

Note: Any parameters changed here will be reflected in Analyst/Tools/Options as they perform the same function. ▲

The access rights that are displayed in Control Center/Tools/Options reflect an accumulation of rights that exist for the current user, resulting from the rights that have been explicitly granted to that user’s own log in account and the rights that the user has inherited through membership of Windows groups. This section is not editable from iTEVA Security and is provided for information only. Any changes to access rights must be made by an administrator or equivalent in the separate program Security Administration.

Access Rights are assigned in the Security Administration program and allow iTEVA Security users to perform various functions as described overleaf.

Tools, Options, Access Rights - (only for iTEVA Security)

Page 39: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-15

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Access Rights

Run iTEVA Security

Allows the user to login to iTEVA Security.

Edit System Settings

This allows the analyst to edit the plasma parameters, change the new method parameters, perform auto peak, torch alignment and source optimisation.

Edit Map Database

Allows the analyst to add new elements to the line library, edit existing wavelengths and make them available for analysis.

Edit Methods

Allows the analyst to edit, delete, create methods.

Edit Samples

Allows the analyst to edit samples e.g. change background points, delete repeats etc.

Edit Sequences

Allows the analyst to edit, delete and create sequences.

Create Reports

Allows the analyst to access Publisher.

Override Method Parameters on Run

Allows the analyst to change the number of repeats, flush time, correction factor, check table use, collection and storage of full frame and export options from sample to sample, rather than using the method parameters.

Figure 2-15. Security Administration program, Access Control

Page 40: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-16 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 2-16. Tools, Options, Access Rights

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Access Rights

Page 41: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-17

iTEVA Software ManualiTEVA SQL Databases

iTEVA analytical data and methods are stored in a user-selected database. This allows the analyst to save and recall data according to a number of criteria that have been setup in the formation of the database. iTEVA databases may be managed either using Microsoft SQL Server Express (provided with your iTEVA installation), or by Microsoft SQL Server (a fully featured database management application).

iTEVA allows data storage up to the capacity of the available storage space. However, SQL Express databases have a limited database file size of 4GB (approximately 70,000 sample records, or 3,000 Sample Records with associated Fullframe images), so it may be necessary to create new databases from time to time and to establish a connection to each database. iTEVA will give a warning at 0.5GB (500MB) before the database size limit is reached. SQL Server databases have no such size limitation.

Data that is stored in an iTEVA database includes the method, sample results and the sequence used to collect the data. The database can be established on the workstation that is used to control the spectrometer or on a separate workstation. You can conserve database space by not storing Fullframe images with each sample.

When running iTEVA Security, the database contains a secure audit trail for all samples (of all types), methods and autosessions. When installed and configured correctly (as per the pre-installation and installation guidelines) the database is protected from access by unauthorized users and from all users using applications other than iTEVA Security. Any changes made to the contents of the that are not made via iTEVA Security are detected by the software, an error is reported and the data is marked as unavailable for use.

Note: iTEVA will not connect to an iTEVA Security database or vice versa and it is not possible to upgrade or convert a database from iTEVA to iTEVA Security or vice versa. ▲

iTEVA SQL Databases

iTEVA Security

Page 42: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-18 iTEVA Software Manual

This contains the information regarding what database is in use for data storage and also, the tools to create new databases etc. Run database wizard can be used to verify databases, attach/detach, create and backup databases.

A new database can be created or an existing database can be either attached or detached or a backup can be created or restored.

Tools, Options, Application Database

Database Wizard

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

Figure 2-17. Tools, Options, Application Database

Database Wizard - Is accessed via the Run database wizard button on the Application Database tab of the iTEVA options dialog box (which is accessed via the Options command on the Tools menu of the iTEVA Control Center window).

The Server Name denotes the name of the server that stores the iTEVA databases, if this is a local server (on the same PC, usual practice for standalone PCs) then the Server Name is “.\iTEVA”. The Server Type and Version are verified before each task is completed.

The analyst must indicate the User name (default “sa”) and the Password (default “teva”). For iTEVA Security, there are no fields for username or password as we are using Windows integrated security.

Page 43: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-19

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

Figure 2-18. iTEVA Database Wizard for standard (above) and iTEVA Security (below)

Page 44: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-20 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

Database Info

Create

Detach

Database Info - Is used to access information about each of the various databases that are present on the server. To obtain information about a specific database, select the database via the dropdown menu under Database Name. The parameters that are displayed cannot be edited.

This is used to generate a new database. When the wizard is opened, the Database Wizard is presented to enter the User name and Password.

1. Enter the User name and Password.

2. Enter the desired name of the new database (it should be unique, as iTEVA will not allow the creation of new databases which name is already in use).

This function is used to detach an active database and will take it offline from the server. This function needs to be performed if you intend to copy a database and send it to another iTEVA analyst, or delete the database from the PC.

1. Enter the User name and Password. Choose Detach.

2. The iTEVA Database field is used to indicate the database to be removed. After you have selected the database to be removed, the Database properties fields will describe the database. These fields cannot be edited.

3. Click OK to detach the database.

This function is used to attach a previously detached database or to attach a database from an external source, i.e. to share/read results and data from another iCAP instrument running iTEVA.

1. Enter the User name and Password in the Database Wizard box.

2. Choose Attach, and click on the ellipsis to the right of the filename to browse for database .mdf file to be attached.

3. The database name will automatically be filled in to match the database file you have selected.

Note for VISTA users: If you see the following error when attaching a database, ‘<database filename> You don’t have permission to open this file. Contact the owner or an administrator to obtain permissions’ this is likely to be caused by Windows Vista user access control (UAC). This means that all users, including administrators, run with restricted rights by default, which must be explicitly overriden in order to run with the administrator rights that have been granted to the user and which are required to attach a database. ▲

There are two alternative ways to work around this behaviour:

1. Turn Vista’s UAC off for your system. Your full set of rights will then be in force whenever you log onto Windows and you will be able to attach the database. To do this, open Windows control panel and select “Turn user Account Control (UAC) on or off”. On

Attach

Page 45: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-21

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

Restore

the dialog that is displayed uncheck the box for “Use user account control UAC” and click OK. You will need to reboot your PC for the changes to take effect.

2. When starting iTEVA Control Centre, run it by right clicking on the application icon or menu item in the Windows start menu and select ‘Run as Administrator’ from the popup menu. Only iTEVA Control Centre will be running with your full access rights, no other programs will be affected.

1. Enter the User name and Password in the Database Wizard box.2. Select the Database to be backed up via the dropdown menu. The

Database properties fields will describe the selected database.3. Click OK to present the backup location dialog box, which is

used to select the path for the backup. Click OK and a prompt is displayed asking for confirmation before proceeding. Select Yes if you want to continue with the backup and a full backup will be performed. It is recommended that the selected backup path is not on the local disk.

This function is used to restore backups of a database for use.1. Select the database from the dropdown menu.2. Click OK and select the location of the backup file that you wish to

restore. 3. A warning will be displayed to advise you that the restored backup

version of the database will be used and will only contain data up to the date that it was backed up. Click Yes to proceed.

Users wizard - Is used to enter a new password for a analyst.

1. Select the name of the analyst for whom you want to modify the password.

2. Enter the old password and new password; then verify the new password.

Periodically, the database that you are storing results to will need to be detached and archived, and a new database created and attached to start saving results to.SQL Express databases have a limited database file size of 4GB (approximately 70,000 sample records, or 3,000 Sample Records with associated Fullframe images), so it may be necessary to create new databases from time to time and to establish a connection to each database. iTEVA will give a warning at 0.5GB (500MB) before the database size limit is reached.Creating a new database involves the following steps (each step is discussed in detail overleaf ).

Users (only for iTEVA,

not present for iTEVA Security)

Creating a new Database

Backup

Page 46: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-22 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

Figure 2-19. Database Wizard

● Creating new database. ● Adding a connection to the new database in iTEVA. ● Making the new connection active. ● Copying methods/results. ● Change active connection.

Open database wizard, type in user name “sa” and password “teva”, choose Create, enter a new database name. Close the database wizard.

For iTEVA Security (as shown below), there is no user name and password field, simply select Create and enter the name of the new database. Close the Database Wizard.

Figure 2-20. Database Wizard for iTEVA Security

Page 47: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-23

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

Add a New Connection

Figure 2-21. Add a connection icon

On the Application database page click on the Add a connection (middle icon) as shown above.

Enter the server name as “.\iTEVA” if connecting to a local server, or select the network server from the dropdown menu.

The user name is “sa”and the password “teva”.

Figure 2-22. Data Link dialog box

Page 48: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-24 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

In iTEVA Security (as shown below), the data link properties dialog should be filled in with the server name .\iTEVASECURITY if attempting to connect to a database hosted locally by SQL Server Express on the same computer as iTEVA Security is running. Otherwise the name of the network server should be selected from the list.

Figure 2-23. Data link dialog box for iTEVA Security

For iTEVA Security (as shown above) should select ‘Use Windows NT Integrated Security’ as opposed to ‘Use a specific name and password’. Select the newly created database from the dropdown menu.

A prompt then appears for a Data link file name (connection) name, [see Figure 2-24 overleaf ] for ease of use it should relate to the database name. Click OK to accept new connection name.

Page 49: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-25

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

To copy existing methods into a new database (which will be empty of results and methods), open Analyst. This will open up the methods page automatically, and from here, highlight the method to copy, choose the Copy to button and select the new database name from the dropdown menu.

To copy results into a new database (or any database), use Results/Open and select the required data, choose Copy to and select the required database name from the dropdown menu. When all methods/results have been copied you require, close Analyst and return to Tools, Options, Application Database.

Note: When results are copied, a copy of the method that they were stored with is automatically copied. ▲

This option is used when the analyst is changing from one database to another, e.g. when looking back at some old data on a different database or attaching a newly created database.

Figure 2-24. Data link file name dialog box

Copy Methods/Results

Change Active Connection

Figure 2-25. Change the Active Connection dropdown menu

On the application database page, use the dropdown menu on the active connection to choose the new connection.

Click Apply - The new database and connection will now store all new results/methods generated.

Deleting a DatabaseDeletion of databases may be required in order to free up space on the PC. This is done by Detaching the database as described above and deleting the associated .ldf, .mdf and .udl files from

C:/Program files/Thermo/iTEVA/Andata.

The connections for those databases may then be deleted as described overleaf.

Deleting/Exporting/Importing/Databases

Page 50: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-26 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Database Wizard

To edit a connection, highlight it from the Available Connections and select the Edit the Connection icon (first icon above) and edit the parameters from the Data Link Properties dialog box. To delete an unused connection, select it from the Available Connections and choose the Delete the Connection icon (third icon above) and confirm the deletion.

Exporting/Importing a Database from/to another iCAPiTEVA and iTEVA Security databases may be detached and attached to any instance of iTEVA or iTEVA Security. Please note that only iTEVA databases are compatible with iTEVA and only iTEVA Security databases are compatible with iTEVA Security. This feature is very useful for transferring data from site to site or for examining data off line.

Notes for Vista

The location of the iTEVA data folders will be different under vista: The following shows the folder location for exporting/deleting databases:

Analytical data C:\Users\Public\iTEVA\AnData

If the database you are trying to connect to was created with a previous version of iTEVA, you will see the following dialog. Users are advised to check the Backup before upgrading box and specify a valid backup pathway before upgrading any database. When the upgrade progress bar is complete and the database upgraded, it is available for use.

Editing/Deleting a Connection

Figure 2-26. Edit/Add/Delete a connection icons

Database Upgrades

Figure 2-27. Database Upgrade dialog box

Page 51: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-27

Presents a dialog box to allowing the analyst to change the Autosampler Type and COM Port. When the autosampler is connected, the analyst must choose the correct model from the dropdown menu and verify the COM port being used. If using an ESI autosampler, you must select CETAC ASX-520 and then use the ESI software to create the new maps required. In Desktop mode, the Auto Sampler Emulation is used to simulate the autosampler actions.

Tools, Instrument OptionsAutosampler

Figure 2-28. Tools, Instrument Options, Autosampler

Sample Introduction The settings here control the Drain Sensor and the coupling of external accessories (for iCAP 6500 only).

Figure 2-29. Tools, Instrument Options, Sample Introduction

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Instrument Options

Page 52: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-28 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualTools - Instrument Options

The Drain Sensor is a unique safety and time saving device which uses a bubble counter to check that at least one bubble passes by every two minutes. This ensures that if the sample introduction becomes blocked/sample tubing has detached that valuable time and gas is not wasted by continuing the run. This is also an excellent safety feature, as it will ensure a safe controlled shutdown from an automated sequence, activate nudge mode on the pump to save the tubing and leave everything ready for the analyst to assess and re-start the system, with no need to re-fill all the sample tubes.

The Enable Drain Sensor option allows the analyst to enable/disable the drain sensor when using accessories that do not require it, e.g. laser, SSEA, ultrasonic nebuliser or hydride accessory (any accessory that does not have a drain actively pumping liquid waste via the instrument peristaltic pump).

The analyst must specify the Accessory being used, such as SSEA and Laser. If an external accessory that is not listed is connected, the analyst must choose the Custom Device option which will enable the Input and Output Trigger options. From here the analyst can choose the options specific to that device.

If an SSEA is specified then the COM port will need to be selected so that iTEVA can communicate with it to send it the frequency and power settings ( See Method, Source Settings ).

Using an SSEA or Laser with the iCAP 6500 Series requires the use of the interface board and accompanying trigger cables for integration.

Note: Please note that this feature is only available for iCAP 6500 Series ICP Emission Spectrometers. ▲

Enable Drain Sensor

Accessory

The Help menu provides access to useful information for the analyst.Help

Help Topics - This provides on-line help, where all aspects of the iTEVA software is described.

Feature request/incident form - This automatically recalls all the variables of the instrument, for example the software version, instrument type, firmware, etc.

Figure 2-30. The Help Menu

Help, Help Topics

Feature request / Incident form

Page 53: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-29

iTEVA Software ManualHelp

Figure 2-31. The Help Feature Request Incident Form

Using this will enable Thermo to obtain all relevant information about your type of instrument to process the feature request or incident form correctly.

Page 54: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-30 iTEVA Software Manual

About iTEVA - This will display the software and firmware version currently installed on the system. This information can be useful when discussing issues with Thermo personnel.

The GUID number is a unique number, which is generated during the software installation.

The purpose of this GUID is to allow the generation of a new ThermoService password for service engineers to access diagnostic software installed with iTEVA. The engineer will contact Thermo who will request the value of the GUID and use it to generate a new password for them.

Help, About iTEVA

Figure 2-32. About iTEVA

iTEVA Software ManualHelp

Note: On-line Help for a given topic can be accessed via the F1 key. ▲

Page 55: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-31

iTEVA Software ManualThe Tool Bar

The Tool Bar includes a series of icons to rapidly access various functions.

The Tool Bar

Figure 2-33. The Tool Bar

Home Page - Not active on this page (this is the home page)

Back - Not active on this page (this is the home page)

Next Page - Not active on this page (use the workspace)

Print Journal

Show (Hide) Journal

About iTEVA

The Workspace presents two icons:

Analyst - Used to access the iTEVA Analyst window and the Select a Method dialog box. To collect, process and report data.

Publisher - Used to generate reports using the analytical data.

The Workspace

Page 56: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-32 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualThe Journal

In each application, the workspace provides a navigational tool between methods, samples, method parameters and other applications.

The Journal is a listing of major activities of the system and is presented at the bottom of the iTEVA Control Center window. It can also be viewed via the Journal Print Preview command and printed via the Print Journal command on the File menu. The complete journal captures the Date/Time, an informational message about the activity, User Name, Application, Sequence Name and a short description of the activity.

The Journal

Figure 2-34. Journal window

The symbol before each entry has the following meaning:

Information icon

Error icon

Alert icon

Debug icon

Typical information presented in the journal includes information, error messages, warnings and alerts. The analyst can select the types of information to be indicated in the Journal via the Options window.

The components of the journal are:

● Date/Time - When the event occurred

● Message - A short description of the activity that occurred

● User Name

Page 57: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 2-33

● Application

● Sequence Name

● Description - Additional information about the activity (e.g. when a sequence is started, this field will indicate the number of samples and standards in the sequence)

iTEVA Software ManualThe Status Bar

To Export the Journal entries, which may be required by Thermo Personnel during a service call, open Control Center/Tools/Options/Journal and choose Export as in above figure.

The Status Bar presents information about the status of the system and provides access to commonly used features.

The fields on the right side of the status bar are:

The Status Bar

Figure 2-35. Status Bar

When the plasma is ignited, this will display the nebulizer back pressure (only for iCAP 6500). this can be used as a guideline to indicate if the nebulizer is becoming blocked during analysis.

Name of individual presently using the system.

Accesses the Plasma Status window to ignite/extinguish the plasma, and view/edit plasma parameters.

Indicates connection of computer to spectrometer. If you are in desktop mode, this will appear as a PC icon (as above in Figure 2-34).

Accesses the Interlock Status window to view Interlock and Plasma status.

Indicates presence of autosampler.

Page 58: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific2-34 iTEVA Software Manual

iTEVA Software ManualNew Firmware

Indicates that the system is connected to the instrument. It displays `X’ if not communicating.

Indicates the completion status of samples being run - green is busy analyzing, blue is analysis complete/ready.

If the software detects that the instrument has firmware that is a different version to that shipped with the iTEVA software, the New Firmware window will be displayed. This window allows new firmware to be downloaded to the instrument. Please follow on screen instructions for correct implementation.

New Firmware dialog box

iTEVA Security:

Note: A user must have ‘Edit System Settings’ rights to be able to download firmware to the instrument. ▲

Figure 2-36. New Firmware Window

Page 59: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 3-1

Chapter 3 Analyst

Page 60: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific3-2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Analyst

Page 61: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 3-3

The Analyst window is opened by single clicking the Analyst button in iTEVA Control Center.

The iTEVA Analyst window is used to establish and perform methods and sequences. All parameters for the analytical tasks are created in the Analyst window. The Analyst window consists of three tabs, Analysis, Method and Sequence. Each of the three tabs has its own program structure as shown in the Figure below.

AnalystAnalyst Window

Analyst Window

Figure 3-1. Analyst - Analysis, Method, Sequence

Page 62: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific3-4 iTEVA Software Manual

AnalystMethod

Three tabs are presented in the workspace:

Analysis - Displays the analyses to be performed and those which are yet to be performed in the present session. A detailed discussion of the Analysis tab is presented in Chapter 5.

Method - Enables the analyst to either create new methods or edit existing ones. It is used to access the various components of the analytical method that is to be used to analyze samples, process data and report data. A detailed discussion of the Method tab is presented in Chapter 4.

Sequence - Controls the functions of the autosampler and the setup of the automated sessions. It displays the sequence(s) to be performed in the present automated session. A detailed discussion of the Sequence tab is presented in Chapter 6.

When Analyst opens, it displays the method directory to allow the analyst to open a method. The commands on the menu bar, the general format of the workspace and the data space are different for each of the tabs and are discussed in detail in the referenced chapters. The buttons and menus are active or inactive depending on the current status within the Analyst.

Analysis

Method

Sequence

Page 63: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-1

Chapter 4 Analyst, Method

Page 64: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Analyst, Method

Page 65: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-3

A method contains the parameters that define the specific protocol for a given quantitative analysis (e.g. the lines to be used, instrumental parameters, information about the standards to be used, etc.). Sequence actions are incorporated into the method to determine how a series of samples are analyzed using an autosampler.

In addition to the analysis parameters, the method enables various storage options for data, print options and report preferences.

Once the Method tab has been clicked, the Menu bar will be displayed, showing further options for Method, Tools, View and Help.

Method Menu Bar

Figure 4-1. Method Menu Bar

Method

Figure 4-2. Method Menu

Analyst, Method

Analyst, MethodMethod

Page 66: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-4 iTEVA Software Manual

6200 models only:

When creating a new method using an iCAP 6200, a method template will open to offer the analyst the choice of four pre-set method templates as shown below. If none of the templates are required and a new method is necessary, select Blank and proceed as below.

Create a new Method

Analyst, MethodNew

For all iCAP models:

The initial step in establishing a new method is to select the elements that will be used in the analysis method. When you select New on the Method menu of the iTEVA Analyst window, a periodic table is presented so that the elements/lines can be selected. The Method Workspace is provided to assist the analyst in establishing/editing a method. The contents of the Data Display Area changes depending on which entry in the method Workspace has been selected. A description of each entry is described in the section Method Reports.

Figure 4-3. iCAP 6200 Method Template

Page 67: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-5

Figure 4-4. Method Workspace

Analyst, MethodNew

Each entry on the Method tab leads to one (or more) options, used to describe a discrete aspect of the overall analytical procedure. For Automated Output and Report Preferences, an option is provided for each sample type (Unknowns, QC Standards, Blanks, Standards, Recoveries, Spikes and Time Scans).

Note: Although the method is changed as soon as you change a parameter, we suggest that you save the method before using it. If you attempt to close an edited method, a dialog box will be presented asking if you want to save the changes. s

Page 68: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-6 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, MethodNew

Note: All elements shown in a gray box can be selected for analyses. The elements in the red boxes cannot be analyzed. s

1. Move the cursor to the first element to be selected (elements with a light gray field can be selected). As you move the cursor, a pop-up box will be presented. It displays the wavelength and order of each line currently available for the element beneath the cursor. Any current method lines are indicated with an asterisk *.

2. Click on the element to select the lines to be used for the analysis of this element.

Figure 4-6. Method, Periodic Table, Cursor information for specific element

Figure 4-5. Method, Periodic Table

Page 69: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-7

Analyst, MethodNew

For some elements, several analytical wavelengths are displayed in descending order of relative intensity. Usually, one of the wavelengths is more sensitive, and performs better (improved precision and detection limits) than the others for particular applications.

If a green tick appears on the wavelength symbol , this means that the wavelength has been finely adjusted during an Auto Peak Adjust.

3. Click on the analytical line that you want to use. A table of nearby interferences for the selected line will be presented.

Figure 4-7. Method, Periodic Table, Line List display

4. Use the list of interferences to decide whether to use the selected wavelength.

5. Double click on the analytical line. The checkbox will be activated (a checkmark will also be placed over the selected icon).

Figure 4-8. Method, Periodic Table, Line List/Interferences Window

Page 70: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-8 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, MethodNew

6. Click OK to accept the line. The periodic table will be reactivated to select another element. The color of the selected element will be indicated in aqua.

The selected line will be indicated by an asterisk (if the cursor is placed on the element).

Figure 4-9. Method, Periodic Table, Selected element displayed in aqua

Note: It is possible to select more than one analytical line for an element by double clicking on them, for example to check for interferences. s

Figure 4-10. Method, Periodic Table, Selected Line marked with asterisk

Page 71: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-9

Analyst, MethodStatus

After all elements have been selected, click OK. The Method tab will be presented in the workspace and the Status window will be presented. The method could now be used for an analytical run.

Note: The analyst can add further wavelengths to each element using the right click Edit Map function. This is explained in Periodic Table, Map Editor [overleaf]. Initially, only the default wavelength selection is displayed. s

If you want to remove an element from a method:

1. Click on the Periodic Table icon to present the table .

2. Click on the element to be removed to present the Line List/Interferences window.

3. Remove the checkmark by double clicking from the Select Element field and press OK or uncheck the Select Element box to deselect all wavelengths for the element.

Figure 4-11. Method, Status Window

Page 72: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-10 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, MethodPeriodic Table

Right mouse clicking on an element in the periodic table opens the following menu. The example below displays the Map Editor for Strontium (Sr)...

Periodic Table, Map Editor

Edit map for Sr... - Opens the map editor, where the Wavelength & Order, Wavelength Range, Column, Row, Peak Status, Relative Intensity are displayed. The analyst can select the elements which should be Available for Analysis or to Auto Select for New Method.

Figure 4-12. Periodic Table, Map Editor

Page 73: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-11

Analyst, MethodPeriodic Table

Add Lines - Clicking on Add Lines opens a dialog box to add an available line from the Element Line Library to the selected lines.

Create - Clicking on Create opens a dialog box to add a new line to the element line library, Edit map.

Figure 4-13. Periodic Table, Right mouse click, Edit Map, Add Lines

Properties - Opens the Periodic Table properties dialog box. See Chapter 2, Tools, Periodic Table for more details.

Figure 4-14. Periodic Table, Right mouse click, Add Lines, Create

Page 74: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-12 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, MethodStatus

Provides the Method Name, Revision and Instrument names as well as the Current Status, the dates the method was created and modified, the Number of Elements and Wavelengths selected for the method. Specific comments can be added to the Notes section.

Status

Figure 4-15. Method Workspace, Status

Figure 4-16. Status Window

Page 75: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-13

Analyst, MethodAnalysis Preferences

The Analysis Preferences option is used to define all of the analytical parameters for the method.

Analysis Preferences

Figure 4-17. Method, Analysis Preferences

Figure 4-18. Analysis Preferences

Page 76: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-14 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, MethodAnalysis Preferences

Figure 4-19. Analysis Preferences, Sample Options

Number of Repeats - The number of times that a given sample should be analyzed (range = 1 to 99), typically 3 repeats.

Delay Time - Additional delay time between sample insertion and acquisition of data (range 0-1000 sec). The delay time is generally only used for solid sample introduction systems, such as spark emission or laser ablation. The delay time is in addition to the uptake (flush) time. It is only enabled when a different sample introduction is selected in the Control Center at Instrument Options/Sample Introduction.

Sample Flush Time - Period of time that the sample flush solution should be used (range 0-1000 sec). It defines the uptake time for the solution to reach the plasma.

Analysis Mode - Can be toggled between Speed and Precision. Speed mode is a unique mode of analysis which analyzes all radial/high wavelength elements for all replicates, then all axial/low wavelength elements for all replicates e.g. for a 3 replicate method with Ca393 and Al167 they are analyzed as follows: Ca393 replicate 1,2,3. Al167 replicate 1,2,3. Speed mode of analysis saves time as it removes the need for settle times when switching from one plasma view to the other, and time savings of up to 30% can be achieved. Precision mode is the traditional analysis mode, which is per replicate, so for the same method the analysis sequence would be: Ca 393 replicate 1, Al167 replicate 1, Ca 393 replicate 2, Al167 replicate 2, Ca 393 replicate 3, Al167 replicate 3.

Note: These two options are only available for iCAP 6500 Series Emission Spectrometers, the 6200 and 6300 Series use the traditional Precision mode for analysis. s

Sample Introduction - The menu lists the sample introduction options that are available. On systems with an external accessory such as a Laser connected, the drop down menu will include this option. (To enable accessories, the analyst must ensure that they are correctly set up on Control Center/Tools/Instrument Options/Sample Introduction).

Sample Options

Source

Page 77: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-15

Analyst, MethodAnalysis Preferences

Plasma View - Auto View, Axial, Radial and Line Selection are the available options. On a Duo system, the default is Axial. Autoview allows the software to decide which wavelengths to run on what view, (it defaults to all lines below 234nm are analyzed Axial and all lines above are analyzed Radial). When using a Radial iCAP, only Radial will be available. If Line Selection is chosen, the analyst must then click Set. This displays the method wavelengths and the default view. The analyst may then use the Move key to change wavelengths from one view to another.

Auto-Increment Sample Names - If this option is selected, the Sample Name for consecutive samples will be automatically incremented (e.g.Soil1, Soil2, Soil3, etc.).

Use Sample Weight Corrections - When this option is selected, the sample grid displays sample weight values and any direct editing of the cell contents corresponds to an edit of the sample weight value. This value,in combination with any other values that may have been set (initial and final volumes, adjustment factor etc.) is used according to the selected equation to determine the correction factor that is applied to the sample.When the method is not set to Use Sample Weight Corrections the grid displays the correction factor values and any direct editing of the cell contents corresponds to an edit of the Adjustment Factor value and will cause the sample weight, Nominal Weight, Initial and Final volumes to be set to 1, so that the correction factor = Adjustment Factor i.e. the value entered by the analyst is applied to the sample as the correction factor. Users may still use a calculated value for the Correction factor, based on sample weights and volumes, but to do this they must edit the values using the ‘Calculate correction factor’ dialog.

The maximum analysis integration time is the longest period in seconds that the signal will be collected prior to processing. Depending on instrument configuration and analytical wavelengths selected in the method, up to four separate maximum integration periods may be required.

Figure 4-20. Analysis Preferences, Source

Analysis Maximum Integration Times

Page 78: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-16 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 4-21. Analysis Preferences, Maximum Integration Times

Analysis Maximum Integration Times (Seconds) - range 1- 120, can be set for Axial and Radial view.

Low Wavelength Range - range 1 to 120.

High Wavelength Range - range 1 to 120.

For typical applications, a reasonable starting point is 15 seconds for the low wavelength range, and 5 seconds for the high wavelength range.

Note: These two options are only available for iCAP 6300 and 6500 Series Emission Spectrometers, the 6200 model will only present one field to cover the wavelength range of the instrument. s

Analyst, MethodAnalysis Preferences

Calibration Mode

Figure 4-22. Analysis Preferences, Calibration Mode

The Calibration Mode field is used to select the desired type of calibration that should be used in the method.

The Type of Calibration is set to either External or MSA (Method of Standard Addition). External mode uses known concentrations of calibration standards to construct the calibration curve, subsequently unknowns and other samples are measured against this to determine their concentration. MSA uses an unknown sample (Spike 0) and a series of spikes (Spike 1, Spike 2 etc.) of that same sample to construct a calibration curve, this is then interpolated to determine the concentration of the original unknown Spike 0 and subsequent other samples can be determined against this calibration.

Page 79: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-17

When the Type of calibration has been chosen, the following options are available, Concentration, Concentration Ratio and Summation to 100%.

Concentration mode compares instrument response to standards of known concentration. Instrument response typically is corrected for background and may additionally be corrected using an internal standard or inter-element correction. In addition, there are two special calibration modes.

These are called Concentration Ratio and Summation to 100%. These may be used to analyze samples for ALL elements present. The results must always add up to 100 percent. In essence, the whole sample becomes its own internal standard.

The calibration mode is selected in the method within the Analysis Preferences window. The selected calibration mode appears in the field to the left of the options bar. Using the dropdown menu displays the options. Moving the cursor to each option will highlight that option and a left-click will insert the option as the selected calibration mode.

Concentration - The concentration of each element in the calibration standards is entered.

Concentration Ratio - The concentration of each element is indicated with reference to the internal standard. The base element is the sole internal standard for the method and the sum of all of the element concentrations must be 100%. If this requirement is not met, the method will default to Concentration Mode.

To use the Concentration Ratio mode, a Standards Table is created which uses a Base Concentration. This appears with a value of 100 percent. The major element in the material is omitted from the list of elements in the standard. This major element is designated as the Internal Standard.

When inserting the concentrations of the various elements, the value for the Base is reduced, so that the total always adds to 100%. After inserting all element concentrations (other than the major constituent), the Base Concentration should equal the major constituent concentration. If not, there may be a small concentration of undetermined species present. These undetermined elements should constitute less than 1% of total composition (preferably less than 0.1%). Provision is made for the inclusion of a “residual concentration”; this residual is an approximation of the concentration of undetermined species.Thus:

C[is] + C[a] + C[b] + ... = 100% - C[r] Where: C[is] is the concentration of the Internal Standard element

Analyst, MethodAnalysis Preferences

Page 80: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-18 iTEVA Software Manual

C[a], C[b], ... are concentrations of elements a, b, ...C[r] is the residual concentration (if any)If both sides of the equation are now divided by C(is), the result is:1 + CR[a] + CR[b] + ... = 100 - C[r]C[is]

Where CR[a], CR[b], ... are Concentration Ratios of elements a, b, ...

Remember that the calibration curve is now relating SIR to concentration ratio; i.e., the value obtained in each case when the concentration of each element in the Standard is divided by the Base Concentration, or the concentration of the Internal Standard element:

CR [a] = C[a]/C[is]

During analysis, the instrument determines intensity ratio values, which are then related to concentration ratios calculated from a calibration curve which has been established in concentration ratio mode. The equation above may then be solved for C[is], the Internal Standard Concentration.

Once this is known, The equation may be solved for all the individual element concentrations.

Summation to 100% - The standard concentrations for all elements add up to 100% including the base element. If this requirement is not met, the method will default to Concentration mode.

Note: The Summation to 100% is generally used in the metals industry where the major elements have to be measured as well as the minors and traces. s

Analyst, MethodAnalysis Preferences

Trailing Fullframe Options

Figure 4-23. Analysis Preferences, Trailing Fullframe Options

Note: This option is only available with the 6300 and 6500 iCAP Series Emission Spectrometers. s

A Fullframe image determines all elements in your sample, from this you can produce semi-quantitative analysis on major and minor

Page 81: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-19

components. Fullframe can also be used to determine the presence of contaminants or to look for unexpected constituents in your sample.

When the elements to be determined are identified, you can simply create a new method using suitable lines. The line selection process is important, to eliminate possible spectral interferences and to match concentration to instrument dynamic range. For each line selected, one or two background correction points should be established.

Intelli-Frame - Selecting Intelli-Frame will enable automated integration time calculation which intelligently integrates all element signals to ensure that they are read/analyzed correctly and will yield semi-quantitative results within 20% of the fully quantitative analyses.

Note: In the Method, Analysis Preferences the analyst only decides to either set the integration times for the Fullframe automatically via Intelli-Frame or manually. In order to perform and save the Fullframe, the analyst MUST select Acquire and save Trailing Fullframe to Database, from Automated Output. s

Maximum Integration Time - Period of time to integrate data using the Fullframe (Range 0.1 to 1000 sec).

WL Range - Indicates if low, high or both ranges should be used. To gain the complete spectral picture of your sample, both a High and a Low Wavelength Fullframe is required.

Analyst, MethodAnalysis Preferences

Page 82: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-20 iTEVA Software Manual

Automated Output

Analyst, MethodAutomated Output

The formats of the Automated Output tabs are identical for each sample type except for standards. The tab for each sample type includes an Apply to all Sample Types button to copy a template from one sample type to another.

Note: If desired, the settings can be overridden using the Run dialog box, which is presented when a sample is to be run. This is not applicable for iTEVA Security unless the user has been granted the Access Right “Override Method Parameters on Run”. s

Figure 4-24. Method, Automated Output

There are different types of samples which can be run:

Unknowns - These are the samples to be analyzed.

QC Standards - Quality control check samples.

Blanks - These are blank samples, not the calibration blanks. Every time a sample blank is analyzed, all following unknowns will have this value subtracted from them until the next sample blank is analyzed. To enable this function, the Blank Subtraction must be ticked in Method/Report Preferences. This can be applied post run via right click on the samples and selecting Edit Report Options.

Page 83: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-21

Standards - Calibration standards to generate the calibration graphs.

Recoveries - Recoveries are samples analyzed and checked against stored values.

Spikes - Spikes can be used for Standard Addition.

TimeScans - TimeScans are used for transient signals and often with accessories like the Laser.

If you want to use the same output format for all sample types, click the Apply to All Sample Types button. For each of the solutions the analyst can set up a different template.

The Automated Output for Unknowns tab is accessed via the Automated Output command on the Method menu. It is used to indicate the location(s) to which the data is to be sent. A window is presented for each type of sample, as different output formats might be used for each sample type.

Figure 4-25. Method, Automated Output dialog

Print results - Prints results automatically after each analysis. If Print results is not selected, the analyst can print the results at any time after the analysis. Data will be printed using the format selected in the Method, Report Preferences window and the general print format for the Print Options tab of the iTEVA Options dialog box.

Acquire and save trailing Fullframe to database - If this option is selected, the Fullframe will be performed and the data will be stored. First, the

Analyst, MethodAutomated Output

Automated Output, Unknowns

Page 84: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-22 iTEVA Software Manual

selected wavelength(s) will be analyzed and afterwards the Fullframe will be taken.Note: This option is only available with the 6300 and 6500 iCAP Series Emission Spectrometers. s

Export results to comma-delimited text file - Automatic export function. The data will be exported after each sample. As soon as Export results is activated, the analyst can type in a Filename in the Export Information. There are two options available for the files, Append or Overwrite. The data will be exported to a file using the name Append/Overwrite selection described below.

Export Filename - This field is used to indicate the filename to be used to store the data as a text file. The file will be stored in the directory indicated in the Options tab of the iTEVA Options dialog box. Sample results can be converted to comma delimited information and sent to remote destinations and the contents viewed using text or spreadsheet software. Such exported results are convenient for transmission to laboratory information management systems (LIMS).

A checkmark in the box next to “Export Results to a Comma Delimited Text File” will automatically convert each result to a text file, with each field separated by commas. The data is then inserted into the export filename displayed in the field at the bottom of the Automated Output Screen.

The default storage mode for Export Results is Append.

Append - If the Append selection is chosen, the data will be added to the existing file.

Overwrite - If the Overwrite option is selected, data presently in the file will be overwritten.

Note: At time of analysis, each Run dialog box provides a checkbox for immediate selection of the auto-export feature. Run time selection of the auto-export feature is limited to append mode only. The filename found in the current method’s Automated Output will be used. s

Save results to database - This field is used to indicate if you would like to store the data from the method. You can indicate the library you would like to save results to by creating a new one or using an existing library. To create a new library, type the name in the field; to select an existing library, access the dropdown menu.

Apply to all Sample Types - Is used if you want to copy what you have selected for a given sample type to all sample types.

Note: An Intelli-Frame image requires more than 1 MB of disk space. This option is not normally used for the analysis of routine samples, because of storage limitations. s

Note: The analyst can set up different templates for each sample type. The data for each individual sample type can be stored in a different Library. New libraries are created by simply typing the new name in the Library text field. s

Analyst, MethodAutomated Output

Page 85: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-23

The template is only slightly different for Calibration Standards, where a Report can be automatically created after the calibration graphs have been generated.

Figure 4-26. Method, Automated Output, Standards

Figure 4-27. Method, Automated Output, Standards

After calibration, automatically print a calibration plot report? - Check this box for automatic print.

Include standards read back - To include standards read back values, click the box.

Note: The analyst can always print the report afterwards via the Method, Print Options, if the option was not selected. s

Analyst, MethodAutomated Output

Automated Output, Standards

Page 86: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-24 iTEVA Software Manual

The Report Preferences selection includes a tab for each sample type (Unknowns, QC Standards, Blanks, Standards, Recoveries and Spikes). Each tab is used to indicate the type of information that should be reported/stored for that sample type. The format for each sample type is identical, but not all options are available for all sample types.

Figure 4-28. Method, Report Preferences

The Report Preferences tabs are used for indicating the type of information to be presented for each type of sample. As described below, there are small differences for each sample type.

The Report Preferences for Unknowns tab is used to select the type of

Report Preferences

Analyst, MethodReport Preferences

Report Preferences, Unknowns

Figure 4-29. Report Preferences, Unknowns

Page 87: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-25

information to be presented on the screen, on the written report and to be exported.

Output Mode

Analyst, MethodReport Preferences

Figure 4-30. Report Preferences, Unknowns, Output and Default View

Figure 4-31. Report Preferences, Unknowns, In Concentration Output Mode, apply

The In Concentration Mode Output, apply fields are used to indicate how data should be treated when Concentration is selected as the Output Mode. In Concentration Output Mode, the following options can be applied:

Output Mode is used to indicate the nature of the data output as Intensity, Intensity Ratio, Standardized Intensity Ratio and Concentration. The following indicates how the modes are calculated:

Intensity - The time normalized peak is used as the data.

Intensity Ratio - As Intensity, plus: the data is background corrected, the data is multiplied by the “Intensity Factor”. If there is an internal standard for this line, then the Internal standard is background corrected then multiplied by the “Intensity Factor”. The data is then divided by the internal standard.

Standardised Intensity Ratio - As Intensity Ratio, plus: the data is adjusted by the Re- Slope or QC normalization factor.

Concentration - As Intensity Ratio, plus: MSA or concentration calculations are performed.

Default View - This is used to indicate what data should be output Results for all Lines or Element Averages. Results for all lines will list the values per wavelength i.e. if Calcium is analyzed it will be reported with the Element name and wavelength e.g. Ca1840, whereas Element Averages will average values of the same element that are analyzed i.e. if two Calcium lines are analyzed, the two values will be averaged and reported as Calcium.

In Concentration Output Mode, apply

Page 88: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-26 iTEVA Software Manual

Print Limits, Significant Figures, Blank Subtraction, Line Switching and IECS.

Note: The various options that are required should be indicated with a checkmark. If Limit Checking is selected, the dropdown menu will list the Limit Checks that are incorporated in the method. This field is not active if an output mode other than concentration is selected. s

Analyst, MethodReport Preferences

Figure 4-32. Report Preferences, Unknowns, Calculate Correction Factor.

Correction Factor - If the correction factor is not a known or exact factor, e.g. Factor 10, the analyst can click on the Question Mark button, which will open a new dialog box to calculate the correction factor.

Correction Factor Components - Values can be entered, such as the Sample Weight, Nominal Weight, Initial Volume, Final Volume and Adjustment Factor. This is particularly useful when working with oxides, carbonates, etc., to display a final/total concentration.

Page 89: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-27

Limit Checking - If the analyst would like to carry out limit checking, the box must be checked and the appropriate Limit Check table selected.

Note: The Limit Check table is created in Method, Checks. s

Screen Report, Print Report and Exported Report

Analyst, MethodReport Preferences

Figure 4-33. Report Preferences, Unknowns, Screen Report, Print Report and Exported Report

The Screen Report, Printed Report and Exported Report fields are used to indicate the information to be included in the various reports.

The analyst can select which of the following options should be included:Average, Statistics, Repeats, Errors, Wavelength, Int.Std. ref, Print units and Checks.

Report Preferences, QC StandardsThe Report Preferences for QC Standards tab is similar to that for Unknowns except that the only Output Mode selection is Concentration. The Limit Checking feature in the In Concentration Mode Output, apply field is disabled.

Report Preferences, BlanksThe Report Preferences for Blanks tab is similar to that for unknowns except that the only Output Mode selection is Concentration.

Report Preferences, StandardsThe Report Preferences for Standards tab is similar to that for Unknowns except that the only Output Mode selection is Intensity Ratio and the In Concentration Output Mode field selections are not active. The Print Units and Checks options are not available in the Report Options fields.

Report Preferences, RecoveriesThe Report Preferences for Recoveries tab is similar to that for Unknowns except that the only Output Mode selection is Concentration.

Report Preferences, SpikesThe Report Preferences for Spikes tab is similar to that for Unknowns except that the only Output Mode selection is Intensity Ratio and the In Concentration Mode Output field selections are not active. The print units field is required and the Checks are not available in the Report Options fields.

Page 90: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-28 iTEVA Software Manual

The Checks window is used to create Quality Control Check tables, Recoveries tables, Limit Check tables and Duplicate Check tables, which can be incorporated into the method.

Figure 4-34. Method, Checks

These tables are used to set limits for various activities. As an example, a Quality Control Limit table is used to indicate the acceptable range for a QC sample, and to indicate the limits for a warning or failure.

The general protocol for entering parameters for the various check types is similar for each of the four protocols. The Checks window, is used to select the check type to be established and to enter the parameters. This window is opened by selecting Checks on the Method Workspace.

Analyst, MethodChecks

Checks

Figure 4-35. Checks Window

Page 91: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-29

Analyst, MethodChecks

Figure 4-36. Checks, New Check Table Dialog Box

Checks window - Supplies three buttons for creating new checks, duplicating checks and deleting existing checks.

New - To establish a new check protocol, click New to present the New Check Table dialog box. The default Check Type is QC and the default Check Name is QC-1.

Page 92: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-30 iTEVA Software Manual

Copy - Allows an existing checks table to be duplicated. Enter the New Check name in the dialog box.

Delete - Deletes an existing check table.

Check Type field - Supplies a dropdown list of allowed check types including QC, Recovery, Limit Check and Duplicates.

To change the check type, click the down arrow in the Check Type field to present a menu containing the four check types. When you select the desired check type, some of the fields in the dialog box will change, as described below.

Check Name - This is an identifier that correlates the solution, values and failure actions.

Range Units field - This field is a dropdown list. Selection may be Relative (+/-), relative +/- uses the concentration value plus or minus another concentration value set as warnings or failures e.g. 10ppm +/- 0.1ppm. Relative (%), relative % uses the concentration value plus or minus a percentage of that value set as warnings or failures e.g. 10ppm +/- 1%, which is the same as the setting it to relative +/- 0.1ppm for the same value.Absolute, absolute uses the exact concentration values only e.g. 10ppm with a high warning of 10.10ppm and a low warning of 9.9ppm.

Default Check Ranges - Define upper and lower limits for warning and failure.

Where the check sample has a known value such as a QC or Recovery, the known value is included.

Standard Normalization type - This is a dropdown list of provided failure actions.

AnalystChecks

Figure 4-37. Checks Window

Page 93: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-31

OK - When the entries are complete, clicking on OK will enter the defined values into the method Check window for all analytical lines in the method. A new table will be opened, which summarizes the Check values that you have just entered.

Individual values for each line can be modified if desired.

Note: Only a QC check can initiate actions to be taken such as, Re-calibrate, Repeat Sample Analyses, etc. Any other check type, such as Recovery, Limit check or Duplicate can only pass or fail. s

Uses a check sample to determine that the concentrations of elements in a specific sample are within the limits prescribed by the analyst. The sample should be one that is well defined (i.e. the concentration of the elements of interest is known with a high degree of accuracy) but it need not be a standard.

Analyst, MethodChecks

Check Type, QC

Figure 4-38. Checks, QC Check Type

Figure 4-39. Checks, Range Units

Page 94: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-32 iTEVA Software Manual

Warning and Failure Limits - When QC Check is selected, the analyst can select the Failure limits, the Warning limits and the expected value for the parameter. The values entered via this dialog box refer to all elements in the method.

Range Units - The Range Units can be set to Relative +/-, Relative %, or Absolute.

There are three options for normalization.

Analyst, Method Checks

Figure 4-40. Checks, Standard Normalization type

The global actions are set in Standard Normalization type to either Slope, None or Offset.

To change the normalization action for a particular element, click on the cell in the Norm column and desired element row to view the dropdown list shown in the figure above. Move the cursor to the desired normalization function and click to accept.

None - This option will do nothing.

Slope - Will adjust the calibration curve slope value as displayed in Method, Element, Fit, so that the instrument response for the highlighted QC sample corresponds to its known concentration.

Offset - Will adjust the Y-intercept so that the instrument response for the highlighted QC sample corresponds to its known concentration.

The following calculation is used to produce the SIR (which can then be used to calculate the Concentration ): It is basically an adjustment to the Intensity Ratio - the background corrected intensity.

SIR = ( IR - ( RY + NO ) ) / ( RS * NS )where:Intensity Ratio Value = IRRe-Slope Slope = RSRe-Slope Y-Int = RYNormalise Slope Factor = NSNormalise Offset = NOExample of how QCs work in iTEVA - setting values for failure and warning limits.

Page 95: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-33

In the example shown in the figure below, the expected value of all elements is 10.00. A warning will be issued if the reported value is < 9.90 or > 10.10 and a failure will be issued if the reported value is <9.80 or > 10.20. Since we have selected the Absolute Range Units option, this could refer to a concentration range of 10.00 ppm +/- 0.10 for the warning and 10.00 +/- 0.20 for failure. At this stage, only one value for each warning/failure can be entered.

Analyst, Method Checks

Check Type, Recovery

Figure 4-42. Check Type, Recovery

Figure 4-41. Checks WindowNote: This window is used to set specific values for each element or remove an element from the test. You can click in the table matrix itself and the values can be edited for each individual element. s

Note: Within the Method Checks, the analyst sets up the criteria for passing or failing. Please note that the Actions to be taken if a QC sample fails during an automated run are chosen in the Method, Sequence Automation. s

To remove an element from the check, remove the checkmark from the first column.

To change the Failure, Warning or Value fields, click the field and enter the desired value.

This is a type of quality control check in which an unknown sample is spiked (an additional concentration of the element(s) of interest is added and then reanalyzed). The analytical result should be the original

Page 96: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-34 iTEVA Software Manual

result plus the concentration of the added spike (the spike is then said to be “100 % recovered”). In theory, any interference of a spectral or chemical nature will cause the recovery of the spike to deviate (either positively or negatively) from the ideal of 100 %.

When Recovery is selected on the New Check Table dialog box, the Default Check Range fields are Low Failure, Low Warning, Spike, High Warning and High Failure. The range units are the same as for a QC check. Selection of parameters in the Checks dialog box is identical to that for QC check, except for the Std Normalization type. The Spike value is the concentration of the element(s) of interest that was added to the sample.

To use the recovery function, you must first analyze an unknown, then select Results/Run Recovery and select the appropriate recovery check table from the dropdown menu. Recovery samples can also be inserted into sequences using the appropriate icon on the sample list view.

These are applied to unknown samples. A limit check table contains a list of elements along with a high and low acceptable result for each. A result which falls above its high limit check, or below its low limit check will be flagged. For example, if the high limit is set at the High Standard concentration, then a decision to dilute the sample can be made based upon high results.

When Limit Check is selected on the New Check Table dialog box, the Default Check Range fields are Low Failure, Low Warning, High Warning and High Failure. The Range units are the same as for a QC check.

Selection of parameters in the Checks dialog box is identical to that for QC check.

Note: The Limit Check table can be activated for use in Method, Report Preferences. s

Analyst, Method Checks

Check Type, Limit Check

Figure 4-43. Check Type, Limit Check

Page 97: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-35

This is used to determine if two (or more) analyses of a given sample provide the same analytical result within a user-specified tolerance.

When Duplicate is selected on the New Check Table dialog box, the Default Check Range fields are Low Failure, Low Warning, High Warning and High Failure. The Range units are the same as for a QC check. Selection of parameters in the Checks dialog box is identical to that for QC check.

Note: To use the duplicate function, you must first analyze an unknown, then select Results, Run Duplicate and select the appropriate duplicate check table from the dropdown menu. Duplicate samples can also be inserted into sequences using the appropriate icon on the sample list view, when inserted as part of a sequence; they must be directly after the parent sample. s

Sequence Automation refers to the addition of a series of steps before, during or after an analysis.

Analyst, Method Checks

Sequence Automation

Check Type, Duplicate

Figure 4-44. Check Type, Duplicate

Figure 4-45. The Method Workspace, Sequence Automation

Page 98: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-36 iTEVA Software Manual

The Sequence Automation feature is used to indicate the checks that should be performed during an automated analysis and to indicate the desired action if the test is not passed. A check can be performed before, during or after a sequence is performed. The general protocol for selecting Initial Actions, Continuing Actions and End Actions is identical (but the activities differ).

Operations which qualify the sample preparation, standards, method and instrument may be required for every sequence of samples run and, if so, should be completed under Initial Actions operations. Blanks, calibration checks, and recoveries are continuing actions that need to be run frequently throughout the entire sequence of samples to ensure the instrument is operating constantly within control.

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Figure 4-46. Sequence Automation

Page 99: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-37

Initial Actions

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

The option to Start with a Spectrometer Optimisation is a default option which will perform a check of the plasma lines before commencing the sequence.

To establish an Initial Action:

1. Click Add Action to activate the next open line of the Initial Actions field.

2. Click on the Operation field to present a menu that includes the available operations (Calibrate, Re-Slope, Standard Rinse and QC-1) and select the desired operation. Re-Slope is only valid if Re-Slope standards have been assigned for at least one wavelength in the method, see Elements, Standards. If Re-Slope is chosen, but no standards have been assigned, the following warning will appear before the Auto-Session begins. If the analyst chooses Yes, the session will commence without running any Initial Actions. Choosing No will stop the session to allow the analyst to assign Re-Slope standards and re-start.

Standard Rinse instructs the Autosampler to go to its rinse station for the Standard Rinse Time (set in Sequence Automation/Autosampler).

3. Click on the Failure Action field to present a menu that includes the available options (the options will vary with what action is selected) and select the desired

Remove Action - When one of the actions in a panel is highlighted (click to select), the Remove Action button becomes active. Clicking on the Remove Action button will remove the highlighted action from the associated panel only. Placing the cursor on the number column changes the cursor to a black arrow. The black arrow can be used with Control and Shift keys to remove multiple actions.

Figure 4-47. Method, Sequence Automation, Initial Actions

Page 100: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-38 iTEVA Software Manual

Note: As an Auto-Session may be made up of many sequences, the Failure Action Halt will stop only the appropriate sequence and move on to the next e.g. If in an Auto-Session made up of three sequences, A, B and C, sequence A fails, then the autosampler will continue on to run sequence B and C. s

Note: The only action which will constitute a failure for calibration is the saturation of a calibration point. s

Continuing Actions

Figure 4-48. Method, Sequence Automation, Continuing Actions

Continuing Actions - The Continuing Actions field is used to enter operations to be performed during the sequence. Continuing Actions have an application frequency that appears in the column labelled Frequency. In the example displayed above QC-1 would be analyzed after the 10th, 20th, 30th, etc. samples.

QC samples are defined for each method in Method, Checks. To change an operation, click on it under Operation, move the cursor to the desired action in the dropdown list, and click to select it.

The roles of the Operation and Failure Action fields are similar to that for Initial. The Frequency column is used to indicate the interval between the each performance of the operation. As an example, if 10 is chosen, the system will perform the desired operation after every 10 samples.

Note: Frequency defines how many samples are analyzed between the QC samples. As a default, the frequency is set to 10, therefore the QC sample will be run after every 10 samples. s

The only check operations that can be performed during a sequence are QC methods and the failure options are None and Normalize.

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Page 101: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-39

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

In case of a QC failure, the analyst can select one of the following actions:

None - The sequence will continue operating. It flags the results but otherwise ignores the failure, continuing the sequence.

Normalize - Normalizes as per the options set in the check table. The system will change the report for samples that were run since the last QC sample and continue. As an example, if the QC value for Fe was increased by 0.13% since the last QC sample, the concentration of Fe for all unknowns since the last successful QC check or calibration will be multiplied by 1.0013.

Note: Normalize has three options: none, offset and slope. This function is defined separately for each analytical line in Method, Checks. s

Note: During normalization, the concentrations from a QC standard may be used to make a correction to one of the calibration coefficients. A correction may be made to the calibration slope or intercept, but not to both. This procedure may be viewed as a single point re-calibration. Any time that a normalization is performed, the coefficients are first reset to 1 (slope) and 0 (intercept) before the new normalization factor is applied. That is, factors are not repeatedly applied on top of previous factors. The normalization method to use may be selected on an element-specific basis. s

Re-Slope - Re-run the Re-slope standards and generate a revised concentration/system response curve. Re-Slope will run the re-slope standards, if defined in Method, Elements, Standards. When the method has no re-slope standards defined, a warning will inform the analyst before the Auto Session begins.

Re-Slope, Recheck - Re-run the standard to generate a revised concentration/system response curve and then run the QC sample.

Re-Slope, Recheck, Re-run Samples - Re-run the standard, generate a revised concentration/system response curve, then run the QC sample and then re-run all samples that were analyzed since the last QC sample.

Halt - Stops sequence after failure occurs. If other sequences are in the Auto-Session, the autosampler will move onto the next sequence.

Re-Run QC - this option will re-analyse the failed QC.

Calibrate, Recheck - Re-run the full calibration (all standards) to generate a revised concentration/system response curve and then run the QC sample.

Page 102: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-40 iTEVA Software Manual

Calibrate, Recheck, Re-run Samples - Re-run the full calibration (all standards), generate a revised concentration/system response curve, then run the QC sample and then re-run all samples that were analyzed since the last QC sample.Invalidate All Results - this option will invalidate all data that is associated with the failed QC (all samples analysed since the last successful QC). Invalidated data is marked with an exclamation mark ! (as below)

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Figure 4-49. Method, Sequence Automation, End Actions

End Actions - These are identical to the Continuing Actions and feature the same failure options.None - There is no further action and the sequence is closed.Invalidate all Results - Will invalidate the affected analytical results for the samples in the sequence.Halt - Stops sequence after failure occurs.

End Actions

Page 103: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-41

Global QC Properties - The Global QC Properties field is used to indicate what constitutes a failure and what the system should do when a failure is observed.

Number of Failed Lines to Fail a QC Sample - If the analytical protocol is such that the failure of one (or more) lines is acceptable, enter the number of lines that must fail before a failure is reported. For example, the analyst can define that a QC failure is only reported when four lines fail. In this case, the run would continue if less than four wavelengths have failed.

Maximum QC visits per tube location- During operation of a sequence, this is the maximum number of times that a QC standard can be withdrawn from the tube. The allowed number of QC visits per tube avoids running out of QC solution during an automated run.

Re-Slope QC failed lines only - The QC sample should be run again, but only data for the lines that originally failed should be reported. It will perform the failure actions on the subset of failed lines only. For the same subset of lines, failed samples will be re-run, following successful QC checks.

Sound Alarm on 1st failure (2nd failure) 5 sec - Used to indicate that the alarm should be sounded for the indicated period of time. Sound Alarm provides audio support for operators working away from the computer display. Selection and duration of alarms for first and second QC failures are independent.

Extra Rinse After QC failure - this will initiate a rinse (set in Sequence Automation/Autosampler) after each QC failure.

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Global QC Properties

Figure 4-50. Method, Sequence Automation, Global QC Properties

Page 104: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-42 iTEVA Software Manual

The section to the right of Continuing Actions determines how the Autosampler will behave if a failure action should occur.

Max Re-Run Re-Slope attempts - this is the maximum number of times that the system will re-run a Re-Slope before it halts the sequence and moves onto the next. This can be set to either 1 or 2.

Max Re-Run QC attempts - this is the maximum number of times that the system will re-run a QC before it halts the sequence and moves onto the next. This can be set to either 1 or 2.

Max Re-Run Calibration attempts - this is the maximum number of times that the system will re-run a Calibration before it halts the sequence and moves onto the next. This can be set to either 1 or 2.

Note: If the QC/Calibration/Re-Slope fails, then retries and passes, the counter goes back to 0. s

The analyst can set the Rinse Time for the system, select Intelligent Rinse and Sipper Step Ahead.

Continuing Actions Failure options

Autosampler

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Sequence Automation, Continuing Actions

Figure 4-51. Method, Sequence Automation, Autosampler Options

Rinse Time - A fixed rinse time can be set, e.g. 5 sec. The autosampler will run a sample, then go to the rinse station for 5 seconds before continuing to the next sample. This range is from 0 - 600 seconds, setting a 0 second rinse will bypass the rinse station and move from sample to sample.

Page 105: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-43

Note: The following options are only available for the iCAP 6500 Series Emission Spectrometers. s

Intelligent Rinse - The rinse time needed for a sample analysis is usually based on the minimum time needed to rinse out the highest concentration of an analyte that might be present in a sample. Many sequences may never contain analytes at this level or may only contain a few samples in that region. A long rinse time would be needed and add extra time to the sample run even if it were not always necessary. The ability to monitor samples and use only an appropriate rinse time increases sample throughput. By monitoring the rinse station for carry over, IRINSE can ensure that contamination from one sample to the next does not occur. IRINSE is available for both calibration standards and unknowns.

The Intelligent Rinse option is always grayed out initially. In order to activate it, an IRINSE Limit table must be specified, with IRINSE for unknowns and IRINSE_STD for calibration standards.

Setting up Intelligent RinseThis IRINSE check table is set up in Method, Checks. It must be defined as a Limit Check table, with the name IRINSE /IRINSE_STD (it must be all in uppercase, as it is case sensitive). The values input for the sample IRINSE must be in the appropriate units to that element/wavelength, the values input for the IRINSE_STD must be in CTS/S.

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Figure 4-52. Method, Sequence Automation, Check table for Intelligent Rinse

Page 106: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-44 iTEVA Software Manual

Typically, only low and high Failure limits are set for the IRINSE check table. The software will now treat the rinse sample as a special QC sample.

When a sample has completed, the average value (of all repeats) is compared to the IRINSE check.

● If all lines fall below the Low Fail value then no rinse is carried out. The sipper will move to the next sample.

● If all lines fall between the Low Fail and High Fail values then a normal rinse is carried out. The sipper will move to the rinse station for the amount of time entered into Rinse Time, then move to the next sample.

● If any lines fall above the High Fail, iTEVA will initiate Intelligent Rinse.

What does Intelligent Rinse do?

● When IRINSE is activated, the sipper will move to the rinse station and begin measuring the analyte concentration in the rinse using a series of 5 second samples.

● After each sample, the analyte concentration is compared against the IRINSE check.

● Once the concentration of the analyte is less than the High Fail (and, if setup, the High Warn), the sequence is allowed to continue and the sipper moves to the next sample.

● If the number of Intelligent Rinse samples is greater than or equal to the Intelligent Rinse Max Attempts then the auto-session will stop.

When Intelligent Rinse is employed, the Intelligent Rinse samples will not be displayed in the workspace unless it has failed i.e. the maximum rinse attempts has been employed and the concentration is still above the set limit. At this point the auto-session will stop. This is useful if an extremely high level sample contaminates the sample introduction system to a point that it must be disassembled and cleaned by hand.

Note: Please ensure that the units used in check tables correspond to those in the standards table e.g. all in ppm. s

Sipper Step Ahead - This option is used to increase sample throughput. This process involves moving the autosampler sipper probe to the rinse or the next sample while finishing the read cycle for a sample. Typically there is a large distance between the autosampler sipper and the sample introduction system on the ICP, this volume of sample contained in the capillary tubing can be used for analysis. Stepping ahead to the rinse/next sample allows more efficient use of the sample volume and reduces the amount of dead time.

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Page 107: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-45

Advice for setting up step-ahead: Set the pump to the analysis speed and measure the time it takes for liquid to travel from the sipper to the nebuliser: use this as the step-ahead time. You can make it slightly shorter than this if you want to err on the side of safety. Set the pump to the flush speed and measure the time it takes for liquid to travel from the sipper to the nebuliser: use this as the sample flush time. You can make it slightly longer than this if you want to err on the side of safety.

Note: When stepping ahead to the next sample and not to the rinse, set the Rinse Time to 0. s

The use of Intelligent Rinse and Step Ahead can reduce the analysis time considerably. This is especially true for sequences that contain a wide variety of sample matrices with large ranges of analyte concentrations. The rinse time can be set to rinse out common concentrations of the analytes of interest. If analytes fall below this level the rinse is ignored. If the analytes are high in concentration, IRINSE can be employed to rinse the system as needed.

Note: When Intelligent Rinse and Sipper Step Ahead are used in conjunction with each other the sipper probe will always remain in the rinse for the duration of the analysis, as the IRINSE applies the limit check table to a sample after it has been analyzed. If IRINSE is not required, it will reduce the flush time of the next sample to include the Sipper Step Ahead value. s

Source Settings gives access to the Plasma Settings window, which is used to set a variety of instrument settings for the method.

Figure 4-53. Method, Source Settings

Analyst, Method Sequence Automation

Source Settings

Page 108: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-46 iTEVA Software Manual

These settings override the settings from the Plasma Control window when the method is opened and analysis started.

When the Get Current Conditions button is clicked, the plasma conditions in the method are replaced with the current plasma parameters from the instrument.

The Sample Pump parameters include the:

Flush Pump Rate - Pump rate for uptake. The Flush Pump Rate range is 0-125 rpm. Setting this value higher than the Analysis Pump Rate will enable faster sample throughput.

Analysis Pump Rate - Pump rate for analysis. The Analysis Pump Rate range is 0-125 rpm.

Pump Stabilization Time - This is the time taken to change from the Flush Pump Rate to the Analysis Pump Rate. The range is 0-1000 sec. If different values are set for the Flush Pump Rate and the Analysis Pump Rate then it is recommended to use at least a 5 second stabilization delay as this allows the pump to slow down incrementally and avoids wearing the pump tubing out unnecessarily quickly.

Pump Tubing Type - The analyst selects the tubing currently in use with the method. The Pump Tubing Type menu lists the various tubing types that are used with the system.

At the lower part of the window the Source Settings are displayed:

Wavelength Range - Select Low/Both or High, this is useful for optimising the method as you can set the high wavelengths i.e. alkalis to have

Analyst, Method Source Settings

Figure 4-54. Method, Source Settings

Page 109: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-47

a lower RF power and higher nebulizer flow, and leave the optimal parameters for the lower wavelengths in the same method. This option will not be displayed for iCAP 6200 models.

RF Power - The RF power can be adjusted from 750W to 1600W in increments of 200W using the dropdown menu. Any intermediate value can be selected by typing in the value or using the arrow keys. Please note that all Duo instruments are software restricted to 1350W RF as the highest value. The iCAP 6300 Radial is restricted to 1500W RF as its highest value. The iCAP 6200 uses a single fixed RF value of 1150W.

Auxiliary Gas Flow - Gas flow can be adjusted from 0L/min to 2L/min in (iCAP 6500), 0L/min to 1.5L/min (iCAP 6200, 6300) in 0.5L/min increments using the dropdown menu. Any intermediate value can be selected by typing in the value or using the arrow keys.

Note: The following options are not available to all iCAP series models. s

Nebulizer Gas Flow - Gas flow can be adjusted from 0L/min to 1.5L/min in 0.25L/min incremental steps using the dropdown menu. Any intermediate value can be selected by typing in the value or using the arrow keys. This option is only displayed for iCAP 6500 and 6300 Series ICP’s.

Coolant Gas Flow - Gas flow can be adjusted using the option in the dropdown menu. This value is fixed at 12L/min for all 6200 and 6300 models and is only adjustable for 6500 models from 10-20L/min.

Radial Viewing Height - This option is adjustable from 8mm (closest to the load coil) to 21mm. Optimising the viewing height is essential for method development as it affects sensitivity and interference/matrix tolerance. Similarly, it can be used to de-sensitise the system by reverse optimization this is useful for percent level ( 1% = 10,000ppm) level analysis, which allows for analysis without further sample preparation (i.e. dilution). This is only displayed on dedicated Radial systems.

Analyst, Method Source Settings

Figure 4-55. Method, Source Settings, Radial Viewing Height

Page 110: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-48 iTEVA Software Manual

Additional Gas Flow - This option only appears where an additional gas Mass Flow Controller is fitted, it is an accessory that is exclusive to the iCAP 6500 Series ICP and is used to remove Carbon from organics applications. The additional gas (usually Oxygen or Air) is added to the nebuliser gas flow via a T-piece and this combined gas enters the plasma with the sample. Any carbon in the sample forms CO2 and is extracted up the chimney, thus eliminating plasma loading and interferences in the plasma, which allows for easy analysis of organics.

Sample Introduction Settings - These options only appear where a supported accessory is fitted to the iCAP, e.g. a Laser or SSEA.

Laser - The additional options for Laser allow the analyst to choose the following options:Exposure Type: Steady State (normal exposure mode, used for bulk homogeneous analysis with steady signals) or Transient Analysis (transient exposure mode, where only a portion of the signal is integrated, used for trace analysis or where sample mass is limited).

Note: The following options will change depending on which Laser Triggering option is selected. s

Analyst, Method Source Settings

Figure 4-56. Method, Source Settings, Additional Gas Flow

Figure 4-57. Method, Source Settings, Laser Sample Introduction

Page 111: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-49

When Each Sub Exposure is selected the following is available.

Apply Gas Flush Time: First Sub-Exposure Only - this option will apply the gas flush (as specified in Method/Analysis Preferences/Sample Options) before the first exposure (Low or High wavelength reading) of the sample. This is convenient for homogeneous samples or small sample volumesusing a single line pattern for the entire analysis.

Each sub-Exposure - this option will apply the gas flush (as specified in Method/Analysis Preferences/Sample Options) before each exposure (Low or High wavelength reading) of the sample. This is useful for non homogenous laser samples or where individual lines on the laser pattern are assigned for each exposure.

When Each Repeat is selected the following is available.

Apply Gas Flush Time: First Repeat Only - this option will apply the gas flush (as specified in Method/Analysis Preferences/Sample Options) before the first repeat (Low and/or High wavelength reading) of the sample. This is convenient for homogeneous samples or small sample volumes using continuous line patterns for the same sample.Each Repeat - this option will apply the gas flush (as specified in Method/Analysis Preferences/Sample Options) before each repeat (Low and/or High wavelength reading) of the sample. This is useful for non homogenous laser samples or where individual lines on the laser pattern are assigned for each repeat.

When Each Sample is selected the following is available.

Apply Gas Flush Time: Each Sample - this is the only option available which will apply the gas flush (as specified in Method/Analysis Preferences/Sample Options) once before each sample. This is convenient for homogeneous samples or small sample volumes using line patterns for the entire analysis.

The Number of Laser Patterns needed for each sample determines the number of laser patterns required to achieve the desired analysis (based on the options specified). This should then be set in the Laser software.

The Minimum duration of each Pattern (not including gas flush) determines the minimum duration of each pattern so that the analyst can set the laser to fire to accommodate the desired analysis (based on the options specified). The analyst should add the flush time to this, and set into the Laser software..

Analyst, Method Source Settings

Page 112: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-50 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, Method Internal Standards

Internal Standards

Figure 4-59. Method, Internal Standards

Figure 4-58 Method, Source Settings, SSEA Sample Introduction

SSEA - The additional options for SSEA control the Frequency of the sparking on the sample and the Power level. There is also a triggering option, this is set depending on your sample type, choosing First Repeat Only will allow the SSEA to spark the sample continuously for all repeats specified in the method, Each Repeat requires that the SSEA door be opened and closed between repeats, which would allow the analyst to move/rotate the sample between repeats.

The Internal Standards window is used to indicate the internal standards that are used in the method. Internal standardization can help compensate for sample viscosity effects and plasma loading to improve the accuracy and precision of analytical results in emission spectrometry.

To set up and use an Internal standard correctly, first choose an element that is not present in your samples or matrix. Then add it in equal concentration to all samples and standards alike using an Internal Standards mixing kit (part number 8423 120 51551 available from Thermo Fisher Scientific). In a plasma system, the internal standard will typically have a dedicated peristaltic pump channel that is added into the sample introduction line before the nebulizer. Since the internal standard is introduced at a constant rate, its signal should remain constant. The analytical lines referenced to an internal standard report a corrected concentration value based on the ratio of analyte to internal standard intensities.

Page 113: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-51

In fact, all calculations performed by iTEVA software for determining concentrations of analytes are based on Intensity Ratio. This value is defined as the background corrected intensity signal of the analyte line (Ia) divided by an internal standard value (Iis).

IR = I[a]/I[is]

If the analyte line is not referenced to an internal standard line, then the value of I(is) is set to unity (1). In this case, the intensity ratio is numerically equal to the background corrected intensity of the analyte line Ia. If the analyte line is referenced to an internal standard line, then the value of I(is) is the background corrected intensity of the internal standard line and the analyte intensity ratio is given by the equation above.

Clicking the Select Internal Standards button displays the Periodic Table with the method elements in gray. Your internal standard element should be one of these elements.

Analyst, Method Internal Standards

Selecting Internal Standards

Figure 4-60. Method, Internal Standards, Periodic Table Selection

If you require an additional element for the internal standard, click ok to close this periodic table and add the element to your method using the Change Elements icon, then come back to this page.

Figure 4-61. Method, Change Elements

Page 114: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-52 iTEVA Software Manual

To select a line for any internal standard, highlight (click) the internal standard line, then highlight the line to be referenced and click on the Left Arrow button to move the line into the Referencing Lines window. Clicking on the line in the Referencing Lines field and selecting the Right Arrow button eliminates the internal standard reference for that line.

Matching internal standard and referenced lines in both view (Axial/Radial) and wavelength range (High/Low) is recommended.

Note: The Arrow buttons are only active when an appropriate line has been selected. s

The Line selection box shows only the element lines already selected in the method. One line must be chosen for the checkbox to be active. Be sure to click in the checkbox if the checkmark is not visible before clicking on OK to accept.

Note: When the internal standard line is accepted, the line will appear in the Internal Standard Lines field in Method/Internal Standards. s

Analyst, Method Internal Standards

Figure 4-62. Method, Internal Standards Selection

Internal Standard shows a listing of Internal Standard Lines and Referencing Lines.

Internal Standard Lines - Click on Select Internal Standards and choose one or more internal standards. Only the elements previously selected in the method are displayed. Referencing Lines lists all of the lines that the internal standard is applied to.

Page 115: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-53

Lines that Reference No Internal Standard lists the lines without any internal line correction. Use the arrow buttons to add or remove elements.

The elements selected in the method are displayed automatically in Lines that Reference No Internal Standard. Select the lines you wish to correct with an internal standard and add them to Referencing Lines using the left arrow button, which has become active.

Gate 1 and Gate 2 are used for transient signals. Gate 1 is used to start integration and Gate 2 to stop it. For example, if the overall integration time is set to 30 sec, and Gate 1 is set to 5 sec and Gate 2 to 20 sec, the data collection is defined from 5 to 20 seconds.

The fields for Gates 1 & 2 provide line-specific integration timing. When a sample is run, the integration for the listed line will be delayed for the value in Gate 1 (in seconds).

The integration continues until the total elapsed time (including Gate 1) equals the value in Gate 2 (in seconds). When both gates 1 & 2 are set to zero, no gating is applied. These fields must be identical for internal standards and the lines referenced to the internal standard.

Note: Place a checkmark in the Use as Internal Std Only box and the internal standard element will be reported in intensity. If left unchecked, calibration standards for the internal standard element are required. s

The Standards window is used to enter information about each calibration standard that will be used to generate the standardization curve. By default, the method will contain a Blank and a HighStd as the software needs at least two points to construct a curve. The default settings are 0 ppm for the blank and 10 ppm for the High Standard.

The analyst can edit or delete these standards, or add entirely new ones.

AnalystInternal Standards

Standards

Figure 4-63. Method, Standards

Page 116: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-54 iTEVA Software Manual

External calibrationsClicking on the Add button produces a New Standard dialog box. The dialog box provides fields for the new standard name and one default concentration. After clicking on the OK button the new standard is added to both the Standard Name and Concentration Tables.

Add - To add a standard to the list, click the Add button to present the New Standard dialog box. When a standard is added, it is assumed that the standard contains all of the elements in the method at the concentration indicated in the Default Concentration field. To deactivate elements in a standard, simply click on the checkmark to the left of the element name in the Concentration column. Similarly, if the concentration of an element in the standard is different to the default value, enter it in the Concentration field in the Standards window.

Analyst, Method Standards

Figure 4-64. Method, Standards Window

Figure 4-65. Method, Standards, New Standard Dialog Box

Page 117: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-55

Typically, two standards; a High Standard and a Blank are used to generate a standard curve. The concentration of the high standard should be somewhat higher than the highest sample concentration that you expect to encounter, this will allow all of your sample analysis to fall within the calibrated concentration range.

Standard Name - The Standard Name table contains the names for all standards created for a given method. Clicking on a standard name will highlight that entry. In addition, placing the cursor on the number column changes the cursor display to a black arrow to facilitate moving standards, in order to change the sequence in which they are analyzed.

Standard - Whichever standard is highlighted in the Standard Name table is also displayed in the Concentration table. The standard name is repeated above the concentration table. Within the table there is a column of checkboxes (all the elements in the method, and their concentrations). Clicking on any checkbox toggles the inclusion of the element. Without the checkmark, the element symbol and concentration are grayed out, indicating inactive status. The default concentration entered in the New Standard dialog box (shown above) appears in the concentration column. Click on any element’s concentration value to edit its contents.

Note: The analyst can either change the default values/name to the actual concentration used or the standards can be deleted and new standards can be added. To delete a standard, highlight it by clicking on its name in the Standard Name column to activate the Delete Stds button, then click on Delete Stds button. s

MSA calibrations

Analyst, Method Standards

Figure 4-66. MSA Calibration

Page 118: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-56 iTEVA Software Manual

When MSA is selected as the Calibration Mode, the Add/Copy/Delete dialog boxes refer to the MSA Spike concentrations. The Include MSA-Blank check box will add a matrix blank to the beginning of the MSA calibration - this is normally only used when all samples have been diluted into the same matrix and will correct for any difference due to this. When this option is selected, it will be reflected in Method/Elements/Fit/MSA-Blank subtraction where the Use MSA-Blank subtraction check box will be activated. This may be deselected after analysis if required.

A window is provided for each element in the method to indicate information about the analytical procedure.

There are five tabs within Elements.

Analyst, Method Elements

Elements

Figure 4-67. Method, Elements

General - Contains the element name, concentration factor and reporting units.

Standards - List of concentrations for the standards used , facility to assign Re-Slope standards..

Fit - Generating calibration graphs.

IECs - Set up for Interfering Element Corrections.

Page 119: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-57

Subarray - Set up of the measuring parameters for each wavelength, and Fullframe image data for that particular element.

Analyst, Method Elements

Figure 4-68. Method, Elements

The General tab for method element is shown below.

Figure 4-69. Method, Elements, General

Elements, General

Page 120: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-58 iTEVA Software Manual

Element Name - The default name for the element will be displayed, which consists of the element symbol followed by the wavelength. The filename can changed in the text field, e.g. calcium oxide, etc. The Element Name field defaults to the element symbol and 4 significant wavelength figures, a useful identifier for both element and wavelength. This field may be edited and the change will appear in subsequent results for the analytical line. For example, results calculated as an oxide might be better understood with an alternate result label (see below).

Analyst, Method Elements

Figure 4-70. Elements, General, Result Labelling

Figure 4-71. Method, Elements, General, Timing

Timing

Gate 1/2 - The fields for Gates 1 & 2 provide line-specific integration timing. At the start of running a sample, the integration for the listed line will be delayed for the value in Gate 1 (in seconds).

The integration continues until the total elapsed time (including Gate 1) equals the value in Gate 2 (in seconds). When both gates 1 & 2 are set to zero, no gating is applied. These fields are disabled when the line is referencing an internal standard and the gate values from the internal standard are employed.

Intensity Factor field - Multiplies the signal counts by the entered value to achieve a scale expansion. The default is 1 or no scale expansion.

Page 121: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-59

Referenced Internal Standards

If internal standards are used in the method, the above dialog box is presented which indicates what Internal Standard the particular wavelength is referenced to.

Analytical Report

Print Units - Indicates the concentration units for the analytical report. The units should relate to those used in the Standards concentration table e.g. all ppm.

Significant Figures - Is used to select the number of significant figures to be indicated in the report of intensity (concentration, etc).

Note: In Method, Report References, the Print Limits were defined. In Method, Element, General the actual Print Unit and Significant Figures are selected. s

The Conc. Factor field - Multiplies the calculated concentration for the associated analytical line by the value entered. The default value is 1.

Once the parameters for one element have been entered, select the next element listed under Method, Elements on the left hand side.

The parameter set can be different for each element. For example, traces can be reported in ppb and majors in ppm.

Global changes can be incorporated by right clicking and selecting Update for all lines.

Analyst, Method Elements

Figure 4-72. Method, Elements, General, Referenced Internal Standards

Figure 4-73. Method, Elements, General, Analytical Report

Page 122: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-60 iTEVA Software Manual

The following only appear when a method uses IEC (Interfering Element Correction):

Number of referencing lines - Displays the number of referenced IEC correction elements for this wavelength.

IEC Line Priority - The priority of the line can be chosen if multiple IECs are applied to a wavelength. When the priorities of all of the measured lines of an element (assuming there is more than one) are set to the same value, including zero, the calculated average of all of the lines will be used.

Note: Lines which are flagged as containing errors - because of saturated peaks, for example - will be excluded from use and from averages. When line priorities are set to different values, the line with the highest priority which does not contain an error will be used. If two or more lines are assigned the same priority value, then their average will be used in accordance with their priority. If a line is not reported because its value lies outside of its line-switch limits, it will not be used, and the next highest priority line will be used instead. s

IEC Line Concentration Threshold - The threshold value (normally after which, the IEC correction is no longer linear) can be entered. If a line’s IEC is greater than the threshold it won’t be used in the IEC calculation. The Enable Threshold button activates the use of this threshold.

Display in Analytical Report - This option is checked as default, unchecking it will not report that line on screen in Analyst/Analysis or any subsequently exported reports. This option may be checked or unchecked at any time (before or after analysis).

The Standards Tab is used to enter information about the standards that contain the element. In addition, the tab is used to set up re-slope standards.

Note: The list of standards entered in Method, Standards will be displayed as a table under the heading Calibration Standards. s

Calibration Standards - The table shows the type, in this case C for calibration, the Standard Name and the Concentration, as entered previously in Method, Standards.

Add Calibration Std - A calibration standard can be added by clicking the button Add Calibration Std. The concentrations can then be entered. All calibration standards have a known concentration and will be used to generate a calibration curve.

Analyst, MethodElements

Elements, Standards

Page 123: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-61

Add Setup Std - Clicking the button Add Setup Std adds a setup standard to the calibration standard. A setup standard does not have certified values. They are not used to generate calibration curves, but to obtain readback concentrations. Set up standards are run along with the calibration standards to obtain an (S) IR and plotted on the calibration curve by calculating readback concentration.

Delete - Any of the standards can be deleted by highlighting it first and then checking on the Delete Std button.

Re-slope Standards - Any calibration or setup standard can be added to the Re-Slope Standards by clicking the arrow. It can be deleted by clicking the Delete Re-Slope Std button. Re-slope standards are used to normalize the fit on a routine basis.

When the standards are first analyzed, a calibration curve is generated. This calibration curve can be revisited after some time and updated to the current instrument performance via the re-slope standards. Either one or two (maximum) standards can be analyzed as re-slope standards to update the fit of the calibration curve.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-74. Method, Elements, Standards

Page 124: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-62 iTEVA Software Manual

Note: A maximum of two re-slope standards are allowed for fit normalization. s

Note: The calibration should be checked on a periodic basis using a high and a low standard to reset the slope and the intercept of the line relating the intensity at the present time to that which was obtained at the time of calibration. This is done to correct the system for small changes such as pump tubing wear. The frequency of re-calibration is dependent on the accuracy required by the assay, and is commonly performed on a daily basis. s

To set up Re-slope Standards, select the standard that you want to use by clicking on the number and clicking the >> button. The standard will be indicated in the Re-slope Standards field, along with the observed intensity when it was used for calibration.

Two standards should be selected in this manner.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-75. Method, Elements, Standards table

Note: When you want to Re-Standardize the instrument, select Standardization on the Run menu. When you want to Re-Slope the instrument, select Re-Slope on the Run menu and analyze the two standards that you have selected. After you have completed the analysis of these two samples, the Re-slope and Y-Int values on the Fit tab may change slightly as will other data in the Details field. s

Figure 4-76. Method, Elements, Standards, Re-Slope Standards

Page 125: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-63

The Fit tab displays the calibration plot, information about the plot and the individual data points used to construct the plot, which is then used for quantitation.

The Element Parameters Fit tab contains a plot of Standardized Intensity Ratio vs. concentration. At the top of the plot the Date of Fit appears. The date reports when the standards were run and accepted, and it is not editable. The Type of Fit reports the calibration algorithm used. With only two standards, the fit type is limited to linear. Regression calibration fits are most influenced by the higher concentration standards. One way to give more significance to lower concentration standards is with Weighting.

The Weighting field on the plot is used to select the desired weighting option:

● None - all points are equally weighted.

● 1/Conc - forces a weighting that is biased towards the lower concentration standards and forces the blank to zero. When 1/Conc is chosen, the weighting for each point is calculated as follows: If the standard concentration > 0, Weighting = 1 / standard concentration. If the standard concentration = 0 (i.e. for the Blank), Weighting = 1 / (the next lowest non-zero standard concentration x Weighting Zero Factor) where: ‘Weighting Zero Factor’ is a setting in the Control Centre options, on the New Method Parameters tab, it is called Calibrations Conc Weighting Zero Factor and defaults to 1000.

Analyst, MethodElements

Elements, Fit

Figure 4-77. Method, Elements, FitClicking and dragging across an area of the plot will expand that section. Multiple expansions are permitted and remembered.

When the cursor rests on any standard shown on the graph, a box identifying the standard will appear. Right-click to view the dropdown

Page 126: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-64 iTEVA Software Manual

menu. Where Add User Standard appears in the dropdown menu above, the options of Delete Standard and Set Emphasis now appear. Delete Standard will remove the standard from the calibration fit calculation and standards list. Set Emphasis provides a dialog box where the standard’s significance can be modified.

Calibration data for a given element can be viewed by selecting the element of interest from the Elements entry on the workspace and selecting the Fit tab. If desired, you can look at a section of the plot in an expanded format (Zoom) by pointing the arrow at one corner of the desired area and dragging the mouse to the opposite corner of the area.

Note: The Cursor panel is active when the cursor is over the graphical display. It shows the numerical values for the SIR and concentration at the cursor location. s

Quantitation of samples via ICP involves the determination and use of an intensity-concentration relationship to determine the concentration of the elements of interest in unknowns. There are two general approaches to quantitation via ICP: Calibration and Re-Slope.

Calibration - In some cases, the relationship between concentration and intensity is not linear and a more complex relationship is used to obtain a useful working curve. The generation of a nonlinear concentration/intensity relationship is termed calibration. The intensities of the programmed lines of standard solutions are determined by the instrument. Curve fitting is used to generate the optimum relationship between the intensities and the concentrations of the elements. Calibration involves the use of several standards and allows the use of weighting of points, as well as selection of the type of fit. Advanced CurveFit options are activated via the Advanced button.

When doing a Calibration Curve using the equation below:

SIR ={ A0 + (A1 * Cn) + (A2 * C2n) }

where: A0 is the Offset coefficient

A1 is the Gain coefficient

A2 is the Curvature coefficient n is the exponent that produces the best fit of points to the curve

C is the Concentration of the element

Fit Types

Linear - sets the A2 coefficient is set to 0 and the N exponent is set 1 for all calculations.Curvilinear - sets the N exponent to a value of 1 and the A0, A1, and A2 values are calculated with A2 preferably being a negative value.

Analyst, MethodElements

Page 127: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-65

Full Fit - applies all of the parameters for the calculation.

Note: Advanced CurveFit options are activated via the Advanced button. s

Re-Slope and Recalibration after the spectrometer response is calibrated with standards of known concentration, it is recommended that the response be monitored periodically with quality control standards. If the results for the quality control samples fall out-of-specification, a recalibration or re-slope should correct the problem. Recalibration uses the full calibration standard set, while Re-slope uses a maximum of two standards. Re-slope uses the method calibration fit and recalculates.

The Standardized Intensity Ratio (SIR) is determined at the time of original calibration. IR, the Intensity Ratio, is obtained for a High and a Low standard.

The results of re-slope are used to construct two simultaneous equations which are solved for m and b.

Eq.2 SIR = m * IR + b

Where: SIR is the Standardized Intensity Ratio (the intensity ratio measured at

time of calibration)IR is the Intensity Ratio measured nowm is the slope of the lines relating the current intensity ratios to the

originally measured intensity ratios.b is the intercept of the lines relating the current intensity ratios to the

originally measured intensity ratios.Equation 2 is used to convert IR’s for unknown samples, QC checks or blanks to SIR’s. Typically, the value of m is very close to one and b to zero. When only one re-slope standard is employed, b is assumed to be zero.

The Standardized Intensity Ratio (SIR) is used in all calibration modes.

Line Switch

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-78. Method, Elements, Fit, Line Switch and Print Limits

Line Switching is used to extend the dynamic range of an element, where two or more wavelengths of different sensitivity are used. The concentration range for each line can be defined, which defines the Line Switching point.

Page 128: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-66 iTEVA Software Manual

Go to Method, Elements, Fit and check the box next to Line Switch. Two small red arrows will appear in the calibration graph, displaying the Low and High line switch limits. Click and drag the arrow to the desired location, while keeping the left mouse button pressed down. Once the cursor is at the desired location, release the left mouse button and a pop-up window appears, where the values for the low and high limits can be entered. Repeat this for every element for which you wish to specify line switching limits.

Note: When a checkmark appears in the Line Switch box, and markers appear at the bottom of the graphical

display, signifying low and high concentrations where alternate lines are used. s

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-79. Method, Elements, Standards, Line Switching Arrows

Figure 4-80. Method, Elements, Standards, Line Switching for Ca

Page 129: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-67

Note: An example is the use of two lines for Calcium, the wavelengths 393nm (sensitive line used for low concentration) and 184nm (less sensitive for higher concentrations). For the Ca393nm line, the Low switch would be set to 0ppm and the High switch to 2 ppm. For the Ca184nm line, the low limit would be set to 2 ppm and the high limit to a much higher concentration (normally the top standard concentration). The Ca concentration up to 2 ppm will now be measured using Ca393nm and any concentration above 2 ppm, using Ca184nm. Some analysts may choose to use a cross over area (where the concentrations overlap for both lines) - in this case, both lines will be reported and the analyst will need to choose the line based on their own skills at that point. s

Print Limits

If you wish to use Print Limits, the option is activated in Method, Report Preferences by checking the Print Limits box.

When a checkmark appears in either the High or Low print limit boxes, the print limit markers will appear at the top of the calibration graph. The print limits can be set by dragging and dropping the markers, or by right clicking and selecting Print Limits which will display the Print Limits dialog box.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-81. Method, Setting Print Limits

These markers indicate that if the observed concentration is below (or above) the user specified limit, a limit warning will be reported. The low print limit can be defined by the MDL or MQL. When checkmarks appear in more than one of the MDL, MQL, and Low print limit boxes, the report will reference the lowest exceeded limit.

Page 130: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-68 iTEVA Software Manual

MSA-Blank Subtraction

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-83. Method, Element, Fit, Advanced Options

Figure 4-82. Use MSA- Blank subtraction

If the method being used is an MSA method and the Include MSA-Blank option has been selected in Method/Standards this check box will automatically be selected. It can be toggled on or off to see the effect of the MSA-Blank after analysis.

Advanced Curvefit Options

If the standardization curve includes three (or more) points, you can modify the significance of individual standards. Weighting can be an inverse function of concentration or of variance. The Advanced... button presents the Advanced Curve Fit dialog box, which is used to select limits and weighting options.

The Advanced button provides Low and High fields for entry of exponent (n) limits. Exponent values outside the range of 0.6 to 1.2 usually produce an unacceptable level of curvature. Weighting options based on concentration or variance must handle zero values. The 1/C and 1/V fields provide for the entry of specified zero case factors. The 1/C field defines relative significance based on the next-lowest, non-zero concentration multiplied by the value entered.

Full Fit Exponent Range - When Full Fit Exponent range is selected, a Linear fit will be generated. The data is forced to the “best” straight line. It is based on a linear least squares regression fit of the standards as described in the equation below.

SIR = A0 + (A1 * Cn)where:

Page 131: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-69

A0 is the OffsetA1 is the Gainn is the exponent that produces the best fit of points to the curveC is the Concentration of the element

The range for n can be set by the operator via the Advanced Curvefit Options dialog box. For most work, the default range of 0.6 to 1.2 should be used, and should not be changed without a thorough understanding of the analytical rationale for the change.

Weighting Options - When Weighting Options is selected, a curvilinear fit will be generated. The curvilinear fit will be the best fit for all data, determined using the equation below. The curvilinear fit requires a minimum of three standards. SIR = A0 + (A1 * Cn) + (A2 * C2n)

where:

A0 is the Offset coefficientA1 is the Gain coefficientA2 is the Curvature coefficientn is the exponent that produces the best fit of points to the curveC is the Concentration of the trace or alloying element

The Full Fit Exponent Range fields are used to set the limits for n. Normally these values are not changed. Reducing these values reduces the weight of the blank. The range for the 1/C and 1/V factors is 1-10,000. Increasing the value of 1/C increases the bias of the lower concentration samples and the blank but may force the line off of other points. The 1/V parameter should not be changed.

The linear regression calculations described above assume that the standard deviation is constant over the range of measurements. The user should note that this assumption is not true for data acquired from an ICP system with a CID detector. The standard deviation is approximately proportional to the square root of the intensity (and hence to the concentration). The result of the variation of the standard deviation is a natural bias in the calculation to more accurately fit the higher values and therefore, create inaccuracy at low concentrations. This bias can be overcome by applying weight factors to the calculation. A weight factor based on inverse weight or inverse variance will counteract the natural bias and result in residual errors being spread more evenly throughout the calculated relationship. Calibration allows you a degree of control over what weighting functions to use and how they are applied.

The Weighting field on the plot is used to select the desired weighting option:

Analyst, MethodElements

Page 132: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-70 iTEVA Software Manual

None - all points are equally weighted.

1/Conc - forces a weighting that is biased towards the lower concentration standards and forces the blank to zero.

1/Var – this weights calibration points based on how much variance there is between the repeats of each replicate standard. The lower the variance, the more tightly grouped the replicates are and therefore the more heavily weighted they will be, compared with standards which have high variance. You need a minimum of 4 repeats in order to use 1/Variance weighting.

DetailsThe Details panel contains the calculated values of the concentration calibration curve shown below. When only two standards are employed or a linear fit is demanded, A2becomes zero.

Calibration relates a quantity called Standardized Intensity Ratio (SIR) to concentration. The SIR is the intensity ratio measured at any given time, normalized to that measured at the instant of original calibration. The allowed order of fit depends on the number of standards used. The standard calibration equation relating SIR to Concentration is:SIR = A0 + (A1 * Cn) + (A2 * C2n)

where: A0 is the Offset coefficientA1 is the Gain coefficientA2 is the Curvature coefficientn is the exponent that produces the best fit of points to the curve

Correlation Coefficient - Is a descriptive index which serves to specify the overall dependence between Standardized Intensity Ratio (SIR) and concentration (for a two point line, this value will be unity).

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-84. Method, Elements, Fit, Details

Page 133: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-71

Standard Error of Estimation - Measures how close the data points lie on the calculated curve. The Standard Error is the square root of [the sum of the squared differences divided by the degrees of freedom] and reported in concentration units (for a two point line, this value will be zero).

MDL - Is the Method Detection Limit and the MQL is the Method Quantification Level. The MDL is the lowest concentration where a nonzero concentration can be reported with confidence. The MQL is the lowest concentration where a concentration can be reported with adequate confidence.

They are calculated as follows:

stdError = sqrt(((T*K*E)+(2*R*R/Nr))*(1.0/Np + 1.0/ Nb)*(1.0/n)) * (m/(K*E*I))

mdl = 3.0 * stdError / A1;mql = 10.0 * stdError / A1;

where:T = Average background signal for the blank or lowest conc.

std in calibration (will use reslope blank if calibration has been resloped)

I = Average peak signal for the internal standardR = RMS Detector Read Noise.Nr = Number of NDROs.K = Electrons / count for the iCAP.E = Exposure Time in secondsNp = Number of analyte pixels integrated overNb = Total number of background pixels integrated overm = Reslope Co-efficient or normalisation coefficient in the

case of QC normalisationn = Number of repeatsA1 = Gain coefficient of the calibration curve (sensitivity)stdError = The standard error of estimation of the background

signal.

Note: The stdError calculated by this formula is NOT the standard error statistic reported on the Method Elements Fit page. It is the standard error of estimation of the noise present on the background signal of the lowest standard in the calibration. The statistic that is reported on the Method | Elements | Fit page is the Standard Error of estimation currently described in the Help and relates to how closely the data points lie on the calibration curve. There is no connection between this statistic and the MDL / MQL values. The MDL and MQL can be used in the Analysis results display. If toggled ON, the average result for a line will appear as “<MQL” or “<MDL” if the final answer is less that the calculated MQL or MDL value. s

Status - Reports the condition of the line; that is, if acceptable data is available, errors that occurred, etc.

Analyst, MethodElements

Page 134: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-72 iTEVA Software Manual

Re-slope and Y-intercept values - Compare the current instrument response (requiring a Re-slope) with the original calibration. Values for Re-Slope should be close to 1.00 and Y-intercept should be close to zero. These values can be ignored for a calibration.

Note: If three or more points are used to generate a standard curve, the Correlation will likely be less than unity and the Standard Error of Estimation will likely be greater than zero. If desired, you can add/delete points to optimize the standard curve (i.e. maximize Correlation and minimize the Standard Error of Estimation). s

The Standards Table - Displays the names of the standard for the analytical line highlighted in the workspace.

Concentration columns - Show the absolute concentrations entered and the reported concentrations from the calibration curve.

Difference columns - Show the difference between found and stated concentrations in absolute concentration units and as a percentage of stated concentration.

Signal columns - Show the instrument response to each standard in standardized intensity units (SIR) and the standard deviation of the replicates collected for that standard, a measure of the measurement precision.

Emphasis - Corresponds to the number of times the data point is entered into the curvefit. An emphasis of zero disregards the point entirely.

Right mouse click on Element, Fit

Right-clicking anywhere on the plot area produces the dropdown menu shown on p.4-73. In the top panel are Zoom Up, Full Scale, and Set Scale... options. When at full scale Zoom Up and Full Scale options are disabled.

This panel controls Grid, Tick Marks, and Log Scale options. Clicking on the Grid or Tick Marks option will toggle a checkmark display next to that option. When the checkmark is displayed, the plot will include the option.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-85. Method, Elements, Fit, Std Table

Page 135: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-73

Calibration Plot Commands (Right mouse click)

The general format of the standardization curve can be changed using menu commands that are accessed by right clicking on the plot. A list of commands is presented below.

Zoom Up - Reverses the last zoom action.

Full Scale - Reverses all zoom actions and returns the display to the original dimensions.

Set Scale - Presents a dialog box to select the minimum and maximum X and Y coordinates for the plot.

Show Grid - Toggles grid on/off.

Show Tick Marks - Toggles small guidelines on the X and Y axes on/off.

Log Scale - Presents a sub-menu, which is used to select if the plot should be displayed with the X axis in log format, the Y axis in log format, both axes in log format or both axes linear.

Print Limits - Presents a dialog box that is used to set the print limits. This command is active only if the Low or High (or both) checkbox is (are) checked.

Line Switching - Presents a dialog box to select the lower and upper limit for the use of this line (e.g. low limit = 0, high limit = 10, or low limit = 10, high limit = 22). This command is active only if the Line Switch box has been checked.

Add User Standard - Adds a point to the plot at the present position of the cursor. The data is recalculated to include the new point.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-86. Method, Elements, Fit, Right mouse click

Page 136: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-74 iTEVA Software Manual

Print - Presents the displayed dialog box to select paper size and alignment of the hard copy of the plot. When the desired parameters are selected, the plot can be printed.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-87. Method, Elements, Fit, Calibration Plot Commands, Print (Right mouse click)

If you point the cursor to a standard on the calibration plot, the Add User Standard command is redefined to Delete Standard. If you delete a point, the data is recalculated to represent the new data set.

User standards are arbitrary points which are not from the analysis of a standard, but added by the analyst to modify the calibration fit. To add a point, move the cursor to the desired location for the standard, right-click to display the dropdown menu shown above. Click on Add User Standard to insert the standard. The standard will be added to the Standards Table, with the (S)IR and concentration values defined by the cursor location. The calibration fit will be recalculated.

Page 137: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-75

The Interfering Element Correction, IECs Tab, is used to enter information about the inter-element corrections. These are direct spectral overlaps, and the IEC correction attempts to correct for this overlap (and subsequent contaminated data) by applying a ratioed correction factor to all samples.

Inter-element interferences occur when elements in the sample emit radiation at wavelengths so close to that of the analyte that they contribute to the intensity of the light striking the analyte pixels. If such conditions exist, the calculation will yield a high concentration for the analyte. Applying inter-element corrections removes the effects of these non-analyte emissions.

In Method/ Element/ IEC, the Display Area offers information like that shown above.

In the Inter-Element Corrections (IEC) Table, columns provide the element symbol, k1 (gain), k2 (curvature), and calculation mode.

Only when a checkmark appears in the Use IEC’s box, will inter-element corrections shown in the IEC table be applied.

Click on the Add IECs... button to insert new inter-element corrections. This will display the periodic table with the method elements, except for the element that is currently selected as denoted by the reference on the Info Bar...as above Element Parameters for Cr283.563.. as elements cannot interfere with themselves. The Interfering Element should be one of these method elements.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-88. Method, Elements, IEC

Elements, IEC

Page 138: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-76 iTEVA Software Manual

Highlight an element from the periodic table to select. To de-select, click on the Delete Selected IEC button.

Example of an IEC set up:

When an interfering element has been identified by the analyst (this can be done via Fullframe analysis or the use of the Wavelength Finder in the subarray view).

For example, Cd 226.502 would be interfered with by Fe 226.505 if Fe was present in the same sample. To correct for this, select Cd from Method/Elements/IEC and using the Add IECs... select Fe.

Fe is now listed in the IEC table. The K1 and K2 factors are still set to zero.

The analyst would now generate a calibration curve for Fe (this is normally done using the primary line for the interfering element to gain a good calibration coefficient).

When the calibration is complete, prepare a single element solution (this will be called the IEC QC check) of the interfering element (Fe) at the expected concentration that it will appear in your samples.

To allow iTEVA to calculate the K1 factor, set up a QC Check table with realistic blank limits (to mimic a pure blank for your matrix) and the correct value for the IEC QC Check (Fe value).

Analyse the IEC QC check solution.

When complete, go to Results/QC actions, Auto Calc IEC’s, choose Interferent (in this case Fe). The IEC check will now pass and the K1 factor is added to the method.

If the calibration curve is not linear, a K2 value needs to be entered. Each time the method is run, the interference correction will be applied.

Note: If the IEC K1 factor calculated is less than the normal noise on the instrument i.e. 0.0004, then it is not a worthwhile exercise to apply it - the application of IECs should be based on a concentration value that is at least above the D.L. for that element (the concentration is apparent when running the IEC QC check, as this will appear as the value for the interfered element e.g. Cd may have a concentration value of 14ppb when the Fe IEC QC check in the above example is analysed). s

How an IEC works

Inter-element corrections for each element in the IEC table are calculated and applied to the calibration curvefit for the element highlighted in the workspace.

SIR = A0 + (A1*Cn) + (A2*C2n) + A1SUM[(k1,j*Cj) + k2,j*Cj2)

Analyst, MethodElements

Page 139: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-77

Where:

A0= the Offset coefficient

A1= the calibration Gain coefficient

A2= the Curvature coefficient

n = the exponent producing best fit

C = the Concentration of the analyte element

k1, k2= first and second order IEC coefficients for the jth element

Cj= the concentration of the jth element

j = the interfering element index

If, for example, nickel is the interfering element, the algorithm for the curve becomes:

SIR = A0 + (A1*Cn) + (A2*C2n) + A1[(0.1*CNi) + (0.0214*CNi2)]

The Subarray tab is used to include information about the collection of data for a particular wavelength. All wavelengths are designated a default volume of pixels on the CID which is integrated every time an analysis is run. Low Wavelengths are designated a volume of 60 pixels (in a 5 x 12 arrangement) and High Wavelengths are designated 24 pixels (in a 2 x 12 arrangement). Subarray size can be edited by the analyst, however, this is not recommended practice and should only be considered after the peaks and background have been examined.

The Subarray tab details the default settings for each wavelength and stores Fullframe images that relate to that particular wavelength. If any changes are made to the subarray after examination of the peaks gained during analysis, the changes are reflected here.

The Wavelength Range Selection indicates if the wavelength is a Low or High Wavelength.

The Plasma View Selection is only valid on Duo instruments.

Subarray tab - Displays the subarray values stored for the analytical line in the Map Subarray. The subarray width and height are editable.

Integration Areas - Panel examination locations are not editable from this tab, but the analyst can move/delete/increase background points and move/increase the examination location when examining sub array peaks in analysis.

Analyst, MethodElements

Elements, Subarray

Page 140: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-78 iTEVA Software Manual

Background - The options for background correction are No, Yes or Auto. Auto is the default option and allows the software to choose the lowest background point in the subarray. No will turn off the background correction for that side, Yes allows the analyst to define where the background should be placed.

Note: The following option is only available with the 6300 and 6500 iCAP Series Emission Spectrometers. s

When a valid Fullframe image is collected containing the analytical line and highlighted in the Fullframe images table, the AutoCalc Bkg button becomes active. Clicking on this button will move the background correction points to the lowest intensity locations on each side of the center peak.

Fullframe Images - Any acquired Fullframe image can be displayed in either Fullframe View or 2-D Plot View by clicking on the appropriate button, after highlighting the desired image.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-89. Method, Elements, Subarray

Page 141: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-79

Right mouse click on Subarray Plot

Right-clicking anywhere on the plot area produces the dropdown menu shown to the left. In the top panel are Zoom Up, Full Scale, and Set Scale... options. When at full scale Zoom Up and Full Scale options are disabled.

This panel controls Grid, Tick Marks, and Log Scale options. Clicking on the Grid or Tick Marks option will toggle a checkmark display next to that option. When the checkmark is displayed, the plot will include the option.

Analyst, MethodElements

Figure 4-90. Right mouse click on Subarray Plot

Page 142: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-80 iTEVA Software Manual

The Method Reports portion of the method parameters provide a summary of the method parameters selected for all lines. It is a page-by-page display, starting with the Method Status, Analysis Preferences, etc. The contents of the element reports cannot be altered within the report section of the method.

Figure 4-91. Method, Method Reports

All values entered are displayed and can be printed for future reference.

Analyst, MethodMethod Reports

Method Reports

Figure 4-92. Method, Method Reports, Common Report

Page 143: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-81

There are eight categories for the reports.

Common report - Presents method status, analysis preferences, source settings, automated output and report preferences.

Checks report - Details any QC, limit, recovery or duplicate checks associated with the method.

Sequence report - Details the functions set up for the autosampler analysis.

Element General report - Presents significant figures, units, correction factors, print limits, line switching and more...

Element Subarray report - Presents data from the various Subarray tabs for each element. The size and location of subarray features is shown.

Element Standards report - Presents data about the calibration standards used for each element. The standard names and concentrations are displayed.

Element Calibration report - Is a compilation of the statistics for the calibration for each element, etc. The curve-fit characteristics are given.

Element IEC report - Presents data for element measured, including Inter Element Corrections.

Note: These reports are provided as summaries and cannot be edited. Any editing must be performed via the appropriate window for each element. s

Analyst, MethodMethod Reports

Method, Open Opens an existing method, which can be edited. A stored method can be opened as follows:

Figure 4-93. Method, Open

Select Open on the Method menu to display all stored methods, their creation date, revision number, modified date and Instrument name.

Page 144: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-82 iTEVA Software Manual

Method Query

The Query dialog allows more than one instrument to be queried at the same time. Selecting it opens a dialog box where the instrument name is displayed. Clicking on the ellipsis (to the right of the Instument Name text field) opens another dialog box where the analyst can choose which instrument method database to look at. This option is particularly useful if more than one iCAP 6000 Series Emission Spectrometers are networked together, as it allows the analyst to open and browse methods from all connected instruments.

Figure 4-95. Method Query

Figure 4-94. Method Open, Select a Method Dialog Box

Analyst, MethodMethod Open

Page 145: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-83

Method Revisions

The dialog box includes all saved methods. If you want to see all revisions of a method, check the Show All Revisions box.

Figure 4-96. Method Query, Click Ellipsis

Figure 4-97. Method Open, Select a Method Dialog Box - Show All Revisions

Analyst, MethodMethod Open

Page 146: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-84 iTEVA Software Manual

Copying Methods

The Copy To option allows the analyst to copy methods from one database to another via a dropdown menu option.

Figure 4-98. Select a Method, Copy To, Select a Destination Database dialog box

Method Workspace

When a method is opened, the workspace will indicate the name and the desktop will provide a status of the method.

Figure 4-99. Method Open, iTEVA Window after Method is opened

Analyst, MethodCopying Methods

Page 147: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-85

There are additional options available on the Select a Method dialog, Sign and Audit Trail. To activate these options, highlight the required method from the Select a Method dialog.

Select a Method, Sign

This option allows users with signature access rights to sign the method using the dialog shown below. See Electronic Signatures and Electronic Records. (Chapter 8).

Figure 4-101. Method Open, Sign a Method Dialog Box for iTEVA Security

Analyst, MethodiTEVA Security

iTEVA SecuritySelect a Method, Sign and

Audit Trail

Figure 4-100. Method Open, Select a Method Dialog Box for iTEVA Security

Page 148: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-86 iTEVA Software Manual

Select a Method, Audit Trail

This option displays the method Audit Trail which details all the changes in the method since creation (see example below).

Method, Close

Closes the active open method.

Figure 4-103. Method, Close

When Close is selected, a warning message appears indicating that the actions in progress will close the method and associated files.

Selecting the OK button will proceed with the close routine while the Cancel button will terminate the close routine and return to the Analyst Application.

When the OK button is selected from the above dialog box, a second warning appears if there are changes to the method since the last stored version or if there are samples that have been run but not stored.

Analyst, MethodiTEVA Security

Figure 4-102. Method Open, Audit Trail for iTEVA Security

Page 149: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-87

Selecting the Yes button will update the method changes and store the sample results prior to closing the file. Selecting the No button will close the method immediately. Selecting the Cancel button will terminate the close routine and return to the Analyst Application.

Method, Save - A method can be saved at any time by selecting Save.

Method, Save As - When the Save As command is selected, the Save a Method dialog box is presented.

If you select the Save as New Method option, the Method Name field will be active.

Information entered in the description field will appear in the Notes field on the Status window.

Note: If the highlighted method and the last saved version of the method are identical, the Save option will be disabled. s

Figure 4-104. Method, Save a Method Dialog Box

Analyst, MethodSave a Method

Page 150: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-88 iTEVA Software Manual

Method, Convert to Current Instrument Type - The active method is converted to the Current Instrument Type. This option is activated if methods are imported from other instrument configurations e.g. a Radial method is imported onto a Duo instrument, or the sample introduction type is different ( 6500 ICAP only ).

Method, Advanced - Enables methods to be exported and imported. The dialog boxes that are presented are standard Open/Close dialog boxes.

Method, Print - Shows a list of possible reports to print as shown below. The print dialog box will depend on the printer installed on your system.

Figure 4-105. Method, Print Dialog Box

Analyst, MethodMethod Print

Page 151: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-89

There are additional features available on the Method Menu for iTEVA Security as follows.

iTEVA Security

This option allows users with signature access rights to sign the method using the dialog box, shown below.

Figure 4-106. Method Menu for iTEVA Security

Method, Sign Method

Figure 4-107. Method, Sign Method

Analyst, MethodiTEVA Security

Page 152: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-90 iTEVA Software Manual

Method, Audit Trail

The toolbar duplicates some of the actions on menu control.

Figure 4-108. Method, Audit Trail

Toolbar

New Method - Create a new method

Open Method - Open an existing method

Save Method - Save the current method

This option displays the method Audit Trail which details all the changes in the method since creation (see example below).

Analyst, MethodMethod Audit Trail

Figure 4-109. Method, Tool Bar

Method Tool Bar

The Method tool bar includes a series of icons to rapidly access various functions

Home Page - Goes back to iTEVA Control Center.

Figure 4-110. Method Tool Bar

Page 153: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-91

Back - Goes back one step.

Next - Goes forward one step.

New Method - Allows the analyst to create a new method.

Open Method - Allows the analyst to open an existing method.

Save Method - Allows the analyst to save methods.

Set Plasma to Method Settings - Allows the analyst to set the plasma to the selected method plasma parameters.

Periodic Table - Shows the periodic table, to change elements.

Element Order - The element order can be changed.

Remove Line - The selected analytical line can be removed.

Duplicate Line - The selected analytical line can be duplicated.

Print Method - The method can be printed.

Analyst, MethodMethod Tool Bar

Page 154: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-92 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 4-111. Tools Menu

Tools, Change Element Display Order

Figure 4-112. Tools, Options, Change Element Display Order

The Element Display Order can be changed in this dialog box.

Current Order - On the left hand side, the Current Order is displayed.

Move, Move All - Using either the Move or Move All button, the elements can be transferred in a user-selectable order to the New Order display on the right hand side.

Insert - Using the button Insert, elements can be moved to a particular position in the new order table.

Append - Using the button Append, elements can be moved to the end position in the new order table.

Tools

Analyst, MethodTools

Page 155: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-93

Sort - Will sort the elements in alphabetical order.

Reset - The Reset button will go back to the original setting.

New Order - The New Order of the elements is displayed on the right hand side.

Tools, Options

This will open the New Method Parameters dialog box. These are settings which supply defaults to a method when it is created, and can be adjusted by the analyst.

Figure 4-113. Tools, Options, New Method Parameters

Analyst, MethodTools

Page 156: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-94 iTEVA Software Manual

Plasma parameters - The plasma parameters (Flush Pump Rate, Analysis Pump Rate, RF Power, Nebulizer Gas Flow, Coolant Gas Flow, Auxiliary Gas Flow) can be adjusted from the default values.

Print Units - Print Units can be specified (typically ppm).

Calibration Conc Weighting Zero Factor, Calibration Var Weighting Zero Factor - Values can be entered.

Note: The options displayed will depend on the model of iCAP installed. Any parameters changed here will be reflected in Control Center/Tools/New Method Parameters as they perform the same function. s

View, Show Workspace

Shows the workspace. Click again to hide the workspace.

View

Analyst, MethodTools

Page 157: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 4-95

Help

Figure 4-114. Help Menu

This offers context sensitive help and instructions of how to navigate iTEVA through an index and table of contents. F1 offers help specific to the active page.

About Analyst

This displays the Thermo Fisher Scientific software version number.

Help

Figure 4-115. Help, About Analyst

Analyst, MethodHelp

Page 158: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific4-96 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Analyst, MethodHelp

Page 159: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-1

Chapter 5 Analyst, Analysis

iTEVA Software Manual 5-1

Page 160: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Analyst, Analysis

Page 161: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-3

Analyst, Analysis

The Analysis section of Analyst is used to display data and perform manual analysis via the menu options or icons. If an Autosampler Sequence has been set up, the data will be recorded in the Analysis section for inspection.

Analysis Menu Bar

Once the Analysis tab has been clicked, the Menu bar will be displayed, showing further options for Method, Run, Results, Instrument, Tools, View and Help.

Figure 5-1. Analysis Menu Bar

Method - Handles method files.

Run - Runs Samples, Fullframes and Time Study samples.

Results - Handles results data.

Instrument - Accesses instrument functions like Plasma Control panel.

Tools - Accesses the Wavelength Library, Fullframe Archive (not available on 6200 models) and Analysis Parameter options.

View - Changes sample result and workspace display.

Help - Provides software help and software version information.

The Analysis application has several tool bars that may or may not be active depending on the current operation. The control center icons in the left segment below move between home page and applications. The right segment below contains icons that are displayed when a method is open.

Home Page - Returns to iTEVA Control Center

Back - Returns to previous window display

Analyst, AnalysisMenu Bar

Analyst, Analysis

Tool Bar

Figure 5-2. Method Tool Bar

Page 162: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-4 iTEVA Software Manual

Next (inactive above) - Go to Next Application

New Method - Create a new method

Open Method - Open an existing method

Save Method - Save the current method

Set plasma to method settings - Resets plasma to method settings

Run Unknown - Displays Run Unknown dialog box

Run QC - Displays Run QC dialog box

Run Blank - Displays Run Blank dialog box

Run Calibration Standards - Displays Calibration dialog box

Re-Slope - Displays Re-Slope dialog box

Open Results - This directs the analyst to the Sample Query Library.

Print Results - Print the displayed result

Save Results - Saves the highlighted/displayed result

Analyst, AnalysisTool Bar

Page 163: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-5

Recalculate - Recalculate the results

Post-process - Post-process the selected samples

Show Subarray Plots - Activate Subarray Display

Subarray Display

To display the spectral data for an element wavelength, double click on the sample name, or on the element of interest in the sample workspace. The subarray can also be displayed using the Subarray icon on the Toolbar.

This plot presents a small region of the spectrum and can be used to determine if a line for a given element is free of interference from lines of other elements. The subarrays are normally examined to check for interferences and ensure that the analytical peak is covered by the central integration area (marked C on the subarray plots).

If the analyst decides to disable the left or right background point, this is done by unchecking the appropriate checkbox. Any changes made to the subarray must be enabled by clicking the Update Method button to update the results for all active samples and save the changes in the method for future use. All replicates of the sample can be seen by toggling the number in the Rep# box.

Figure 5-3. View, Subarray Plot with multiple samples displayed

Analyst, AnalysisTool Bar

Page 164: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-6 iTEVA Software Manual

Multiple Samples View - Toggle multiple/single sample(s) view

Run Fullframe - Run a Fullframe sample

MethodMethod

Analyst, AnalysisMethod

Figure 5-4. Method Menu

Method, NewOpens a dialog to create new method.

Method, OpenOpens a saved method.

Method, CloseCloses the currently open method and prompts the analyst to save if any changes have been made.

Method, Close AllCloses all methods open in the workspace.

Method, SaveA method can be saved at any time by selecting Save.

Method, Save AsSaves a method under a different name.

Method, Convert to Current Instrument TypeThe method is converted to current instrument type e.g. a Radial method to a Duo method.

Method, Advanced

Enables import and export options. Methods can be imported or exported using the respective commands. The dialog boxes that are presented are standard Open/Close dialog boxes.

Page 165: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-7

Method, Exit

Exits the Analysis program.

There are additional features available on the Method Menu for iTEVA Security....

Figure 5-5. Method Menu for iTEVA Security

Method, Sign Method

This option allows users with signature access rights to sign the method using the dialog shown below.

Figure 5-6. Method, Sign Method

AnalystRun

Analyst, AnalysisMethod

iTEVA Security

Page 166: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-8 iTEVA Software Manual

Method, Audit Trail

This option displays the method Audit Trail which details all the changes in the method since creation (see example below)

Run

Figure 5-8. Run Menu

The Run menu enables the analysis of samples, either qualitatively or quantitatively.

Run, Run Fullframe (not available for 6200 models)

A dialog box Run Fullframe will open, where all parameters can be set. Fullframe is used to obtain a full data set of all elements in the sample, but the results are qualitative.

A Fullframe image includes all lines that are emitted by the sample within the selected wavelength range. Two Fullframe images are required to fully describe the sample:

Run Full Frame

Analyst, AnalysisMethod

Figure 5-7. Method, Audit Trail

Run

Page 167: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-9

● Low - This corresponds to the lower region of the wavelength range of the instrument which runs from 166 nm to 243 nm.

● High - This corresponds to the upper region of the wavelength range of the instrument which runs from 243 nm to 847 nm.

Qualitative analysis involves the determination of the elements to be analyzed and the lines to be used for analysis.

Whilst the analyst usually has a good understanding of the elements in a sample, the Fullframe image presents a complete spectrum of all lines that are emitted by the sample. If additional elements of interest are observed, the analyst can identify them using the Wavelength Finder function on Fullframe tool bar above the image. Identified elements can then be added to the method by selecting them from the Analytical Elements tab, and right clicking to add to method.

Sample ID Information

Analyst, AnalysisRun

Figure 5-9. Run, Run Fullframe

Figure 5-10. Run, Run Fullframe, Sample ID Information

Fullframe - Enter the filename of the sample.

User Name - The active analyst, currently logged-on, will be displayed.

Page 168: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-10 iTEVA Software Manual

Comment - This logs the wavelength range and view selected for the Fullframe image.

Custom ID - Up to three Custom ID’s can be entered.

Automated Output

Figure 5-11. Run, Run Fullframe, Automated Output

Autosave - If you wish to automatically store the Fullframe image, check

the box next to Autosave.

Note: If you wish to store the Fullframe image, it needs to be activated in Analyst, Method, Automated Output. Check the box next to Store Results To Database. It will be saved to the database library indicated in the Database Information in the same dialog box. s

Note: Since the size of a Fullframe image is greater than 1 MB, indiscriminate storage of these images will eventually reduce the memory for sample data. s

Options

Figure 5-12. Run, Run Fullframe, Options

Analyst, AnalysisSample ID

Page 169: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-11

Intelli-Frame - Indicate if the Intelli-Frame feature is to be used by placing a checkmark in Options. When this feature is selected, the system will collect a series of images at various times (0.03 sec, 0.3 sec, 3.0 sec, 10 sec and 30 sec) and will then determine the appropriate period of time to collect intensity data for each line, to avoid saturation.

Note: If you want to run a trailing Fullframe after every sample, it is advisable to add it as a method function. Go to Analyst, Method, Analysis Preferences, Trailing Fullframe Option and check the box next to Intelli-Frame. s

WL Range - Select either Low, High. To collect a complete description of the sample, you should run Both to cover the full wavelength range of the instrument.

View - Select either Axial or Radial (only available for Duo instruments).

Max Integ Time - Select the Maximum Integ(ration) Time.

Note: If Intelli-Frame is employed, this option is not active. s

Sample flush time - Enter the desired uptake time.

Run - Click Run button to acquire the Fullframe image.

Cancel - Click Cancel if you want to cancel the analysis.

To obtain a Fullframe image:

Figure 5-13. Low Wavelength Fullframe Image

Analyst, AnalysisOptions

Page 170: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-12 iTEVA Software Manual

1. Prepare a solution containing each element of interest. This can be a typical sample or a synthetic sample.

2. Select the Fullframe command on the Run menu to present the Run Fullframe dialog box and enter the parameters.

3. Click on Run to initiate the Fullframe analysis.

When a Fullframe image is collected, the image is presented in the center of the workspace, an information panel is presented on the right side of the display and an entry is placed in the workspace.

Each spot on the image represents a collection of pixels that corresponds to a wavelength. The colored boxes represent the element wavelength location on the CID and are identified on a list to the right of the image.

Fullframe Tool Bar

The Fullframe tool bar includes a number of functions that are commonly used when working with the image.

Figure 5-15. Fullframe Tool Bar

Run Fullframe - Runs the Fullframe image.

Figure 5-14. High Wavelength Fullframe Image

Analyst, AnalysisFull Frame Image

Page 171: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-13

Zoom - Expands the Fullframe Image

Unzoom - Reduces the Image SizeThe Zoom/Unzoom tools are provided to assist in viewing the image. As you zoom in on a small region of the image, the lines become visible as individual pixels.

Lighten - Increases the contrast of the image

Darken - Decreases the contrast of the imageThe Lighten/Darken tools are provided for ease of discrimination between areas of different intensity, so that it is easier to see a line.

Changes display between color and grayscale

2d - presents a histogram to indicate the relative intensity of each pointin a small region of the image

Wavelength Finder - This function allows the analyst to identify elements on the Fullframe image by double clicking on the area of interest and then clicking the Wavelength Finder icon.

Obtain a Histogram

To obtain a histogram, click on a pixel in the region of interest and then click the 2d button. An example of a 2-d plot is shown overleaf.

Note: When the High Wavelength Range is used, the top of the image may appear overexposed due to the large amount of background. This background, which is normal, results mainly from argon continuum emission. When you are working with a Fullframe image, concentrate on the many wavelengths appearing as bright spots in the lower wavelength region of the image. Alternatively, subtract an image of the blank to remove the background. s

Analyst, AnalysisFull Frame Image

Page 172: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-14 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 5-16. 2d Plot of Fullframe Image Region

The upper part of the information panel provides information about a user-selected pixel. A typical display is shown in the figure below. Line information is displayed by clicking on the pixel of interest.

Figure 5-17. Line Information

The lower part of the information panel is divided into three sections:

Elements - This lists all available elements and wavelengths that are available in the Wavelength Line Library. By right clicking on any element in this list, you can choose to highlight it so you can see where it falls on your Fullframe Image.

Analytical Elements - This lists the elements and wavelengths that are available on the view and wavelength range that you have selected. You can highlight elements that are not in your method by right clicking on any element in this list and choosing Add Element to Method, you can also highlight them on the Fullframe for reference.

Method Elements - This lists the elements and wavelengths that you have chosen for the active method.

Analyst, AnalysisHistogram

Page 173: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-15

Figure 5-18. Analytical Element List

Figure 5-19. Line List for Elements in the Method

Run, Run Fullframe, (Right mouse click)

If you right click on the Fullframe image, the menu presented in the figure below is activated.

Figure 5-20. Fullframe Menu

Scroll to - Moves the cursor pixels to the left.

Zoom to - Equivalent to the Zoom tool.

Restore Zoom - Equivalent to the Unzoom tool.

Restore Contrast - Equivalent to the Lighten tool.

Analyst, AnalysisRun Full Frame

Page 174: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-16 iTEVA Software Manual

Synchronize Views - this options allows the same zoomed etc. view for multiple Fullframe images so when moving from one Fullframe to the next, the same portion of the image is displayed.

Select Area - Used to define a region to determine the pixel of minimum and maximum intensity in a user-defined region, so that you can optimally map the line. When you choose Select area, the cursor appears as a plus sign. Position the mouse at one of the corners of the region that you want to view, then drag the mouse to the opposite corner.

To find the pixel with the maximum or minimum intensity within this selected area:

1. Right click inside the defined region.

2. Click Find Maximum (minimum) on the dropdown menu.

3. The cursor will be moved to the area of maximum (minimum) intensity.

Run Time Scan (not available for 6200/6300 models)

Time Scan is used for transient signals.

Figure 5-21. Run, Run Time Scan

Sample ID Information

Figure 5-22. Run, Run Time Scan, Sample ID Information

Time Scan

Analyst, AnalysisRun Full Frame

Page 175: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-17

Sample Name - Enter the filename of the sample.

User Name - The active analyst, currently logged-on, will be displayed.

Comment - This logs the wavelength range and view of the sample.

Custom ID - Up to three Custom ID’s can be entered.

Automated Output

Figure 5-23. Run, Run Time Scan, Automated Output

Autosave - If you want to save the Time Scan image, check the box next to Autosave.

Autoprint - Initiates print out.

Autoexport - The data file can be automatically exported as a text file.

Note: The time scan is listed on the analysis tab and can be manually saved or printed, if desired. s

Acquisition Parameters

Figure 5-24. Run, Run Time Scan, Acquisition Parameters

Analyst, AnalysisRun Time Scan

Page 176: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-18 iTEVA Software Manual

Wavelength Range - Wavelength Range - Select either High or Low.

View - Select either Axial or Radial.

Delay Time - A delay time can be entered.

Sample Flush Time - The uptake time can be entered for the sample to reach the plasma.

Time Slices - The analyst can determine the number of time slices to select.

Time per Slice - The time per time slice can be selected.

Total Time - The total time is then calculated by the software, depending on the number of time slices and the time per slice.

Run Time Scan, Run

Figure 5-25. Run, Run Time Scan Options

Run - Click Run button to acquire the Time Scan.

Real Time Lines - Select lines to be viewed in real time.

Select Lines - The lines to be analyzed can be selected from the dialog box. All elements previously entered in the method will be displayed.

Figure 5-26. Run, Run Time Scan, Select Lines

Analyst, AnalysisRun Time Scan

Page 177: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-19

Cancel - Click Cancel if you want to cancel the analysis.

After Run has been initiated the Time Scan window is used to present the time scan data and allows the analyst to set the timing parameters in the method.

The plot in the upper half of the window indicates the observed data for the element(s), indicated by a checkmark in the element table. The default data is for the peak, but either background or the corrected peak data can be viewed by selecting the appropriate radio button in the lower right hand corner of the window.

A region of the plot can be expanded in the normal manner by placing the cursor on a point and dragging it to the desired opposite corner.

The intensity at a given time can be obtained by dragging the clock to the selected time. The intensity will be indicated in the element table.

Time Scan Tool Bar

Run Time Scan - Runs time scan.

Set Gate Mode - Sets gate mode.

First Derivative - First derivative display.

Figure 5-27. Time Scan data being acquired

Analyst, AnalysisRun Time Scan

Page 178: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-20 iTEVA Software Manual

Run, Time Scan, (Right mouse click)

The pop-up menu presents the following commands:

Figure 5-28. Run, Time Scan, (Right mouse click)

Zoom-Up - If the plot has been expanded (zoomed or via the Scale command) this command will reverse the last operation.

Full Scale - If the plot has been expanded (zoomed or via the Scale command), this command will restore the original plot.

Set Scale - Presents the Scale dialog box, which is used to set the desired time and intensity range for the plot.

Grid - Places a grid on the plot for ease of viewing.

Show Tick Marks - Places a series of short marks on the x and y axis for ease of viewing.

Show Data Points - Indicates each data point on the plot as a circle.

Set Gates Mode - Converts the cursor to a set of parallel lines for determining the gates. A discussion of this function is presented in Selecting parameters via the Time Scan Plot.

First Derivative - Presents the first derivative of the plot.

Print - Presents the Page Setup dialog box to define how the plot should be printed.

The Sample and Gate Times for the method can be selected using the Time Scan window.

Analyst, AnalysisRun Time Scan

Page 179: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-21

Right mouse click on First Derivative displays the data as shown in the figure below.

The Gate values can now be entered.

Figure 5-29. Time Scan data shown as first derivative

Figure 5-30. Time Scan data with defined Gate values

Analyst, AnalysisRun Time Scan

Page 180: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-22 iTEVA Software Manual

Run, Unknown

The parameters for Unknown samples can be entered.

Sample ID Information

Sample Name - Enter the filename of the sample.User Name - The active analyst, currently logged-on, will be displayed.Comment - A comment can be entered.Custom ID - Up to three Custom ID’s can be entered.

Run, Unknown, QC Standard, Blank

Figure 5-31. Run, Run Unknown

Figure 5-32. Run, Run Unknown, Sample ID Information

Analyst, AnalysisRun Unknown

Page 181: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-23

Automated Output

Figure 5-33. Run, Run Unknown, Automated Output

Auto Export File - If you want to export the unknown data, check the box next to Auto Export File.

Autoprint - Results will be automatically printed after the analysis is completed.

Autoexport (append)- Results will be exported as a .txt file after the analysis is completed.

Autosave Fullframe - The Fullframe will be saved if this option is selected.

Output mode: CONC

Figure 5-34. Run, Run Unknown, Output mode: CONC

Correction Factor - If the correction factor is not a known or exact factor, e.g. Factor 10, the analyst can click on the Question Mark button, which will open a new dialog box to calculate the correction factor.

Perform Limit Check - A Limit Check Table can be selected.

Note: The Limit Check Tables are defined in Analysis, Method, Checks. s

Analyst, AnalysisRun Unknown

Page 182: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-24 iTEVA Software Manual

Preferences

Figure 5-35. Run, Run Unknown, Preferences

Repeats - Enter the number of repeats for the analysis, typically 3.

Delay Time - A delay time can be entered. This option is only live when using solid sampling techniques such as Laser or SSEA.

Sample Flush - The uptake time can be entered for the sample to reach the plasma.

Acquire Trailing Fullframe - The checkbox should be checked if you want to obtain a Fullframe of the sample. The Autostore Fullframe checkbox in the Automated Output field will be activated.

Run, QC Standard

The dialog box for the QC Std is the same for the Unknown with the exception that a valid QC Check Table can be selected if required.

Run, Blank

The dialog box for the Blank is the same as for the Unknown.

Run

Run - Click on Run to start the analysis. Run initiates the data collection and presents the Data window.

Analyst, AnalysisRun Unknown

Figure 5-36. Run, Run Button

Page 183: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-25

MSA - Method of Standard Addition

MSA - Method of Standard Addition (MSA) (please note that this options is only active if the method has been designated as an MSA method in Method/Analysis Preferences/Calibration Mode.)

The Method of Standard Addition involves:

1. Measuring the intensity of a line for the element of interest.

2. Addition of a known quantity of the element to the sample.3. Measuring the intensity of the line again (spike concentrations are

defined in Method/Standards).4. Calculating the concentration of the element of interest using the

slope of the line relating intensity and concentration.A major benefit of the Method of Standard Addition is the fact that the sample and the spiked sample(s) are prepared in the same matrix. In contrast, when a external standard curve is generated, the sample matrix may be significantly different, and may affect the accuracy of the analysis.

To access the Analysis by Method of Standard Addition dialog box, which is used to coordinate use of the MSA option, click the MSA button on the Unknown dialog box.

Select Lines

Analyst, AnalysisRun Unknown

Figure 5-37. MSA button

Figure 5-38. Run, Select Lines Button

The Select Lines button accesses the Select a Subset of Lines to Analyze dialog box, which is used to select the lines that you want to use for the analysis.

Select Lines - The analyst can select the lines from the dialog box. All elements previously selected in the Method will be displayed.

Page 184: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-26 iTEVA Software Manual

Cancel - To cancel the Run dialog box.

Run, Re-Slope

Re-Slope will update the recent calibration by re-sloping the calibration line. This option is only active if the method has Re-Slope standards as-signed to it in Method/Elements/Standards.

Note: During Re-Slope, the calibrated fit will only be adjusted for those lines with Re-slope standards assigned to them. s

Analyst, AnalysisRun Unknown

Figure 5-39. Run, Run Unknown, Select Lines

Figure 5-40. Run

Page 185: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-27

Run, Calibration

Run the Calibration standards defined in the method.

Analyst, AnalysisRun Unknown

Figure 5-41. Run, Run Calibration

Calibration Standards - The Calibration dialog box contains all the calibration standards defined in the current method. Typically, each standard is highlighted and run in sequence.

Run - Will start the analysis.

Done - When the desired standards have been run, selecting the Done button will apply the data to the method.

As data is collected on each standard, a checkmark appears to the left of the standard name.

Calibration

Page 186: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-28 iTEVA Software Manual

Running a Calibration

When a calibration is analyzed, either as part of a manual or automated session, the same rules apply to how it will be handled, as discussed in the FAQ section below.

Frequently asked questions regarding Calibration:

When about to run a sample - which calibration is going to be used to generate the results?

This will be the currently saved calibration in the method (this is the most recently run calibration for the method). Click on the method name in the workspace and goto the Method/Element/ Fit to view the calibration curve that has been used.

Which calibration was used to generate the results for an existing sample?

Click on the sample in the workspace and goto the Method/Element/ Fit to view the calibration curve that has been used.

When can calibrations be updated and edited?

When the calibration has not yet been used to calculate any samples. Until then, any standards analysed will update the calibration curve. As soon as a non-calibration standard sample is run, the calibration is locked. Any subsequent standards will create a new calibration and also zero the calibration for all lines that are present in the standard.

What are the equations used to Normalise or Re-Slope the results?

The following calculation is used to produce the SIR (which can then be used to calculate the Concentration ):It is basically an adjustment to the Intensity Ratio - the background corrected intensity.

SIR = ( IR - ( RY + NO ) ) / ( RS * NS )

where:

Intensity Ratio Value = IR

Re-Slope Slope = RS

Re-Slope Y-Int = RY

Normalise Slope Factor = NS

Normalise Offset = NO

Analyst, AnalysisCalibration

Page 187: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-29

Rules for Calibrations:

The calibration is automatically saved to the method (but will not incur a method revision number update) at the following times:

When the last standard is run in a calibration (or Re-Slope) in the sequence

When a standard is run in the Run Calibration dialog

When a standard is run in the Run Re-Slope dialog

When a Normalisation takes place

When a non-Calibration Standard (e.g. Unknown, QC) is run - making the method locked.

Whenever a sample is run, the result is calculated based on the last calibration that was performed with that method. This also means that a sequence may be run on a method without specifying a calibration in the sequence - the samples will be calculated on the existing, saved calibration for that method.

Run, Calibration, Select Lines

Select Lines - Clicking on the Select Lines button allows a subset of method lines to be calibrated.

Analyst, AnalysisRun Calibration

Figure 5-42. Run, Calibration, Select Lines

Page 188: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-30 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, AnalysisRun Calibration

Run, Start Continuous Run

This will initiate the analysis in Continuous mode. The analysis will continue until the analyst gives the command to stop it.

Figure 5-43. Run, Start Continuous Run

Sample Type - Select either Unknown, QC, Fullframe or Time Scan from the dropdown list.

Run Forever - Check the box if you wish to analyze the sample continuously, until you click on the Stop Continuous Run command.

Number of Samples - Enter the number of samples.

Pause Time Between Samples - Enter the required pause time in seconds.

Single Sample Run Mode - If checked, the samples overwrite each other and will not accumulate in the workspace, they are still stored to the database indicated in the method.

Start - Will start the analysis.

Cancel - Will cancel the analysis.

Method Workspace

Right mouse click displays a window showing several options. Depending on the sample type highlighted within the Method, e.g. Quality Control Standard, Unknown, etc., the available options will change.

When an Active Method is selected, the following options are displayed via the right mouse click.

Active Method Workspace

Page 189: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-31

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Copy/Edit Method Methods can be copied/edited to a new method. This will make an editable copy of a method which has samples loaded against it.

Close Method Workspace Closes the workspace.

Select All Samples Selects all samples.

Deselect All Samples Deselects all samples.

Save Selected Samples Saves selected samples.

Print Selected Samples Prints selected samples.

Export All SamplesOpens a new dialog box, where the export file name can be entered. This file is stored at:

C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\export\

by default or as designated in Control Center/Tools/Options/Directories.

Figure 5-44. Method, Right mouse click

Page 190: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-32 iTEVA Software Manual

Post-Process Selected Samples Post-processes selected samples.

Close Selected Samples Closes selected samples.

Edit Report Options Opens a new dialog box, where all currently selected Report Options are displayed. The Report Preferences can be edited, any changes must be saved by saving the sample.

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Figure 5-45. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Export All Samples

Figure 5-46. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Edit Report Option

Page 191: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-33

iTEVA Security

Right clicking on the method name in the Analysis workspace displays the menu below with additional options for iTEVA Security of Sign Method, Sign Selected Samples and Method Audit Trail.

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Sign MethodThis option allows users with signature access rights to sign the method using the dialog shown below.

Figure 5-47. Method Workspace, Right mouse click menu for iTEVA Security

Sign Selected SamplesThis functions in the same way as signing a single sample except that it applies the signature to all samples selected (selected samples are denoted with a green checkmark to the left of the sample icon, this can be toggled on and off to select/deselect).

Figure 5-48. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Sign Method dialog box

Page 192: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-34 iTEVA Software Manual

Method Audit TrailThis option displays the Method Audit Trail which details all the changes in the method since creation (see example below).

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Method Workspace, Unknown and QC

When any sample (Unknown and QC shown below) is highlighted, the following options are displayed via a Right mouse click.

Figure 5-49. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Method Audit Trail

Figure 5-50. Method Workspace, Right mouse click on samples

Page 193: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-35

Sample IdentificationOpens a dialog box where sample details can be viewed/entered.

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Recalculate SampleApplies changes to individual sample, which can be selected via the dialog box.

Figure 5-51. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Sample Identification

Save SampleSaves the sample.

Print SamplePrints the sample.

Export SampleOpens a dialog box where the export filename can be entered, as well as whether to append data to an existing file or to overwrite existing data.

Figure 5-52. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Recalculate Sample

Page 194: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-36 iTEVA Software Manual

Change Sample TypeThe Sample Type can be changed as below,this will change the display e.g. Changing from Calibration Standard to Unknown will change the display from CTS/S to ppm. The new sample must be saved to store it with this change.

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Figure 5-53. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Export Sample

Figure 5-54. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Change Sample Type

Close SampleCloses the sample.

Page 195: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-37

iTEVA Security

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

There are extra options available on the same menu for iTEVA security.

Sign Sample

Figure 5-55. Method Workspace, Right mouse click menu for iTEVA Security

Figure 5-56. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Sign SampleAllows users to Sign the Sample with their assigned signatures.

Audit TrailDisplays the Audit Trail for the sample. This details any change that has been made to the sample since creation and clearly shows the old, and new value for that change. The Show Parents checkbox allows all details

Figure 5-57. Method Workspace, Right mouse click, Audit Trail

Page 196: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-38 iTEVA Software Manual

Sample IdentificationOpens a dialog box where sample details can be viewed/entered.

Save FullframeSaves the Fullframe.

Close FullframeCloses the Fullframe.

Subtract FullframeOpens a dialog box where the filenames to be used for subtractions can be entered.

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

of the sample to be shown, e.g. if a repeat is deleted and then the sample resaved, there will be a new audit trail for the newly saved sample.....by checking Show Parents the audit trail will display the origin of the sample.

Method Workspace, Fullframe (not applicable to 6200 models)

When a Fullframe is highlighted, the following options will be displayed via a Right mouse click.

Figure 5-58. Method Workspace, Right mouse click on Fullframe

Page 197: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-39

Select the filenames to be used for subtractions.

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Figure 5-59. Subtract Fullframe

Figure 5-60. Select the filename for subtraction

Fullframe -1 will now be subtracted from Fullframe -2, leading the Resultant -1.It is possible to carry out a further subtraction. Fullframe -4 will be subtracted from Fullframe -2.

Page 198: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-40 iTEVA Software Manual

This leads to Resultant -2. The Fullframe image is now easier to interpret.

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Figure 5-61. Select filename for further subtraction

Figure 5-62. Resultant-2, Fullframe image

Page 199: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-41

Produce Sample

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Figure 5-63. Fullframe, Right mouse click, Produce Sample dialog box

Produce Sample opens a dialog box where a semi quantitative sample can be created from a Fullframe. This is to produce Semi Quantitative results from Fullframe images for method elements. To optimize this method of semi-quant analysis, the analyst should designate the calibration Blank and at least one Standard as a Fullframe using the right click option, Change Sample Type and designating them as Calibration Stds with their method sensitive names. When all Fullframes have been designated, the analyst can then use the Produce Sample option to gain semi-quant results for the method elements. This can also be done retrospectively.

iTEVA Security

There are additional features available on the Right Click menu for iTEVA Security, Sign Sample and Audit Trail.

Figure 5-64. Fullframe, Right mouse click menu for iTEVA Security

Page 200: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-42 iTEVA Software Manual

Sign Sample

Analyst, AnalysisMethod Workspace

Figure 5-66. Fullframe, Right mouse, Audit Trail

Allows users to Sign the Sample with their assigned signatures.

Audit Trail

Figure 5-65. Fullframe, Right mouse click, Sign Sample

Displays the Audit Trail for the sample. This details any change that has been made to the sample since creation and clearly shows the old, and new value for that change. The Show Parents checkbox allows all details of the sample to be shown, e.g. if a repeat is deleted and then the sample resaved, there will be a new audit trail for the newly saved sample.....by checking Show Parents the audit trail will display the origin of the sample.

Page 201: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-43

Results

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Results

The data is presented on the screen in the format defined in Method/Report Preferences and Method/Elements/General

Figure 5-67. Results Menu

Figure 5-68. Results, Typical Screen Report

The actual format is dependent on the selection. As an example; if limits have been set for an element, an F will be printed to the left of the Avg for elements that do not fall within the acceptable limits range. See the iTEVA Analysis Flags for full details.

Page 202: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-44 iTEVA Software Manual

Post Processing/Method Development Flags

During post processing/method development, the analyst can manipulate the data in many ways e.g. remove background points, turn internal standards on/off, change the emphasis of the calibration curve, change the reporting output of the data etc.

Any time that a change is made that has not been saved (either to the method or the sample); this is indicated on screen (as below).

If a sample has been changed and requires saving, a red X will appear on the sample icon to the left of the sample name.

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Similarly, if a method parameter has changed and not saved, an asterisk will appear to the right of the method name (as below).

Page 203: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-45

Results, Print

A standard Windows Print dialog box is presented.

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Note: If the option, Print results is selected in Method, Automated Output, the results will be printed automatically. s

Note: The parameters to be included in the print report are set in Method, Report Preferences, Printed Report. The options to be selected include Average, Statistics, Repeats, Errors, Wavelength, Int Std ref, Print Units, Checks. s

Results, Open

Figure 5-69. Results, Print

Figure 5-70. Results, Open

Page 204: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-46 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Open accesses the results database and allows the recall of information previously stored. A Sample Query dialog box will be displayed. When you have completed the editing of selection criteria, click Search to present the samples that meet the desired criteria.

Note: All stored data are placed in the Sample Query dialog box, using the active database indicated in the Automated Output dialog box in Method, Automated Output. s

Query Criteria can be limited by any of the top five fields; Method Name, Library Name, Sample Type, Sequence Type and Instrument Name. Clicking on the ... (ellipsis) button to the right of the field will produce a list of entries to choose from.

Between - The Between button allows selection of start and end periods.

During the previous - During the previous button accesses all suitable data starting the entered number of days back and ending with the last saved records.

Chronological Order - If checked, the data are displayed in chronological order.

More - The More... button provides more filtering fields.

Search - The Search button will create a Sample Query List of samples meeting the search requirements.

Cancel - Cancel returns to analysis without acquiring any sample records.

Figure 5-71. Results, Open, More button

Page 205: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-47

The column headings on the Sample Browser are Select, Sample Type, Storage Type, Sample Name, Acquired Time, Storage Time, Mode,User Name, Method, Library, Comment, CustomID1, CustomID2, CustomID3, Valid, Reprocess, Instrument, Sequence.

The data displayed is based on the filters the analyst enabled. From the icons on the bottom of the page it is possible to Select or Deselect all data. The Copy To button allows the analyst to select data and copy it to a different database. Delete allows the deletion of samples. The Query button brings the analyst back to the Sample Query dialog box. Back and Next allow the analyst to move forward and backward through the pages of data, the Back button can also be used to undo the last action (except Delete). Ok enables an action and Cancel disables it.

Data can also be filtered on any field by right clicking on the field and choosing Filter. A selection of data can be highlighted and selected by clicking in the checkbox of one of the selected files, or right clicking to choose Select or Deselect.

Results, Save

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Figure 5-72. Results, Open, Sample Browser

Figure 5-73. Results, Save

Page 206: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-48 iTEVA Software Manual

When saving a sample the analyst can enter additional information about the Sample ID.

If you have not automatically saved the data for a sample, the Sample ID Information dialog box, which is accessed by right clicking on the line in the workspace can be used for that purpose.

Note: Samples for which data have not been saved are indicated by a red X on the sample icon in the workspace (e.g. the beaker for a sample). s

Results, Export

The results can be exported using the file option or manually by right-clicking on a sample.

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Note: If the option, Export results to comma delimited text file is selected in Method, Automated Output, the results are exported automatically every time a sample is taken. s

Note: The parameters to be included in the Export results are set in Method, Report Preferences, Export Report Include. The options are Average, Statistics, Repeats, Errors, Wavelength, Int Std ref, Print Units, Checks. s

The file will be saved in the Export directory - see Options, Directories

Figure 5-74. Results, Export Results

Page 207: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-49

Results, Open Sequence

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Figure 5-75. Results, Open Sequence

Open Sequence - Select the sequence to open in the Sequence Browser.

Results, Save Sequence

Save Sequence - Saves the sequence.

Results, Delete Repeat

Figure 5-76. Results, Delete Repeat

Delete Repeat - Enter the repeat number to be deleted. Any changes must be saved. This option is also available by right clicking on the workspace (results) of a sample. This only applies for single sample view.

Page 208: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-50 iTEVA Software Manual

Results, Run Recovery

Select Run Recovery to analyze the recovery sample.

To run a Recovery Check:

1. Analyze a sample in the normal fashion.

2. Select Run Recovery on the Results menu to present the Run Recovery dialog box.

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Figure 5-77 Results, Run Recovery

3. Enter/edit the appropriate parameters. The Sample ID is assigned Sample_RQ, where Sample is the name of the previously run sample, but can be changed as desired. If more than 1 recovery table has been generated, access the desired one via the Table field on the dialog box.

4. Click Run. The spiked sample will be analyzed and the report will appear as shown below. The recovery information appears at the bottom of the table for each element.

Page 209: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-51

Results, Run Duplicate

Select Run Duplicate to analyze the duplicate sample.To run a Duplicate:

1. Analyze a sample in the normal fashion.

2. Select Run Duplicate on the Results menu to present the Run Duplicate dialog box.

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Figure 5-78. Results, Run Recovery, Analytical Report - Recovery Check

Note: When Duplicate is selected on the New Check Table dialog box, the Default Check Range fields are Low Failure, Low Warning, High Warning and High Failure. The Range units are the same as for a QC check. Selection of parameters and the Checks dialog box is identical to that for QC check. s

Figure 5-79. Results, Run Duplicate

Page 210: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-52 iTEVA Software Manual

3. Enter/edit the appropriate parameters. The Sample ID is assigned Sample_DUP where Sample is the name of the previously run sample, but can be changed as desired. If more than 1 Duplicate table has been generated, access the desired one via the Table field.

4. Click Run. The sample will be analyzed and the report will appear as shown below. The recovery information appears on the bottom of the table for each element.

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Figure 5-80. Results, Run Duplicate, Analytical Report - Duplicate Check

Figure 5-81. Select/Deselect Lines

Results, Select/Deselect Lines

A subset of lines for reporting can be chosen from the dialog box, this will affect the displayed data. This option is also available by right clicking on the workspace (results) of a sample.

Page 211: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-53

Results, QC Actions

If QC Actions were defined in the method, the following options can be selected:

Normalize Slope, Normalize Y-intercept, Normalize From QC table, Matrix Normalize From QC table, Autocalc IECs, Calibrate QC failed, Re-Slope QC failed.

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Figure 5-82. Results, QC Actions

Note: The QC Limits are defined in Method, Checks and the QC Actions for automated sequences only in Method, Sequence Automation. s

Autocalc IECs - Will calculate the KI IEC factor. The interfering element has to be selected from the dropdown list.

Figure 5-83. Results, QC Actions, Autocalc IECs

Page 212: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-54 iTEVA Software Manual

The KI IEC factor is now calculated.

Note: The KI IEC factor will now be displayed in Method, Elements, IECs. s

Analyst, AnalysisResults

Figure 5-84. Calculated KI IEC factor displayed in Method, Elements, IECs

Instrument Instrument

The Instrument section enables the control and optimization of the instrument.

Figure 5-85. Instrument Menu

Page 213: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-55

Instrument, ICP Control Panel

The plasma status is displayed; green is On and red is Off. Please note that options shown below may not be applicable to all iCAP models - iCAP 6200 will not display nebulizer gas flow (it will be either On or Off) or coolant and purge gas flow options.

Analyst, AnalysisInstrument

Figure 5-86. Instrument, ICP Control Panel

Figure 5-87. Instrument, ICP Control Panel and Instrument Status

Page 214: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-56 iTEVA Software Manual

Plasma Status - The status for Gas Flows, Pump Rate and RF Power can be adjusted.

Plasma Off - The plasma can be switched off.

Instrument Status - This icon displays the interlock status for the system, (it is also accessed via the padlock icon on the desktop tool bar). The interlocks displayed are as follows:

Torch Compartment - This is green when the torch compartment door is closed, it turns to red if the interlock is breached.

Purge Gas - This displays if the purge gas is supplied to the instrument.

Plasma Gas - This displays if the plasma gas is supplied to the instrument.

Water Flow - This is green when the water recirculator is switched on and water is cooling the ICP system, it turns to red when the recirculator is off or there is a blockage in the line.

Drain Flow - This monitors the drain flow sensor and will fail if the sensor fails to see an air bubble passing for 2 minutes e.g. if the pump tubing becomes disconnected. When this occurs, the plasma will be safely extinguished and the pump is activated to nudge mode.

Exhaust - This monitors the extraction flow rate from the top of the torch compartment.

Communications - This monitors the communication from the instrument to the PC.

Busy - This indicates if the instrument is performing a task.

Plasma - Indicates if the plasma is ignited (green) or extinguished (red).The three information boxes below this panel allow the analyst to monitor the temperature of the system:

Camera Temperature - The CID camera is maintained at -45 C. The peltier cooler is activated when the purge gas is connected and the recirculator is flowing through the instrument.

Generator Temperature - This displays the temperature of the RF generator and is approximately 10°C above the set recirculator temperature.

Optics Temperature - This displays the temperature of the optics, which is set to 38°C (+/-) 0.2°C.

Save As Post Ignition Defaults - Current setting will be saved as defaults setting.

Edit Post Ignition Defaults - The default settings for post ignition can be edited and saved.

Analyst, AnalysisInstrument

Page 215: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-57

Instrument, Perform Auto Peak

During Auto Peak Adjust the peak locations for the method lines associated with each high standards will be finely adjusted. The usual way to perform this routine is by aspirating the highest concentration calibration standard for the method. The CID will then fine tune the position of each method line onto the chip. This will then be used as the default position for this line until the next auto peak adjustment takes place.

Analyst, AnalysisInstrument

Figure 5-88. Instrument, Perform Auto Peak

Run - Will initiate auto peak adjustment.

Select Lines - Select Lines enables the analyst to select a subset of method lines to peak locate.

Done - Will accept auto peak adjustment.

If the ambient conditions are varying widely the Auto Peak Adjust procedure can be performed at the beginning of an analysis session to optimize the peak location on the CID camera. A standard that contains all of the lines of interest is used and the system automatically makes the appropriate fine adjustment.

Page 216: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-58 iTEVA Software Manual

To perform an Auto Peak Adjust:

1. Select Perform Auto Peak Adjust on the Instrument menu, which presents the Auto Peak Adjust dialog box.

2. If elements corresponding to all lines are in the sample, click Run.

Analyst, AnalysisInstrument

If the Auto Peak is unsuccessful, highlight the element in the dialog box and select Reason, this will explain to the analyst the reason for the failure. If there are multiple lines in the method, the analyst must highlight each line in turn and then select the Reason button. There are two general scenarios to this, either the solution is too weak for the line analysed, or too strong. Simply aspirate a more suitable solution and select the failed lines for re-Auto Peaking.

Note: When the standard does not contain elements corresponding to all of the lines, click Select Lines to access a dialog box listing the lines. Select the appropriate lines and return to the Auto Peak Adjust dialog box. Click Run to perform the auto peak adjustment. This process should be repeated using enough standards to cover all lines of interest. s

Note: This function is not available when coupled to a Laser. For autopeaking with a Laser, the analyst must disconnect, aspirate a liquid solution and then return to the Laser analysis. s

Note: If an Argon Humidifier is configured with the sample introduction, you may need to allow a delay after failures before re-initializing the Autopeak routine. s

Figure 5-89. Auto Peak Warning dialog box

Page 217: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-59

Instrument, Torch Alignment

Analyst, AnalysisInstrument

This initiates an automated torch alignment. The progress is indicated on the progress bar. This should be performed when a new torch is fitted to the system (after cleaning or replacement with a new torch). The automated routine requires the analyst to aspirate a torch alignment solution, which is 2ppm Zinc in either Aqueous or Organic matrix (the organic matrix is ideally kerosene).

Instrument, Optimise Source (this option is only available foriCAP 6500 models).

Figure 5-90. Instrument, Torch Alignment

Figure 5-91. Instrument, Optimise Source

Page 218: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-60 iTEVA Software Manual

This initiates an automated optimization process for the source parameters. The analyst can select the source parameters for optimization such as RF power, Nebulizer Gas Flow, Pump Speed, Coolant Gas Flow and Auxiliary Gas Flow. The minimum and maximum value for each parameter range required can be selected by the analyst as the default behaviour is to optimise all parameters across the entire range, from the lowest to the highest value available.

The source parameters can be optimized for the following:

Best Signal - This calculates background corrected signal intensity.

Best SBR - This calculates signal intensity ratioed against background intensity.

Best DL - This calculates signal intensity ratioed against the square root of the background intensity.

If one element is critical for the method, the analyst can choose to optimise on just that line by using the Select Lines option.

Instrument, Optimize Spectrometer

This function may be performed at any time, and is a routine which ensures that the wavelengths are correctly located on the detector. During this routine, the pump will stop and the nebulizer gas will be turned off - this is because the routine uses plasma wavelength positions, so no sample is required.

This routine will automatically run when the plasma is ignited, and can be set by the analyst to run before an Auto-Session (see Method/Sequence Automation/Initial Actions).

Tools

Analyst, AnalysisTools

Tools

Figure 5-92. Tools Menu

Tools, Wavelength Line Library

The Wavelength Line Library is a compilation of lines that have been reported for the elements that can be analyzed via ICP spectrometry. The library is accessed via the Wavelength Line Library command on the Tools menu. The library can be used in the following ways:

Page 219: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-61

● If a line is observed on the Fullframe image, the library can be used to identify it.

● If you suspect that a line is interfering with the analytical line, you can determine all lines that are in the immediate vicinity.

The Line Library dialog box is used to present a list of the lines in a user-selected wavelength range for a specific element or for all elements. When the dialog box is opened, the analyst should indicate the element by clicking on it in the Element field or choose Select All Elements (the button presents the periodic table for element selection) and indicates the wavelength range. When you have selected a line, you can obtain a list of interfering lines by clicking on the line.

A typical Line Library dialog box is presented below.

Analyst, AnalysisTools

Figure 5-93. Tools, Example of a Wavelength Line Library

Search Results - This table lists the Elements, Wavelength, Rel. Intensity, State, BEC and Det. Lim.

Search Criteria - The Elements and the Starting and Ending Wavelength can be chosen by the analyst. The Search button will initiate the search following the criteria set.

Page 220: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-62 iTEVA Software Manual

Interfering Lines - This table list the interfering Elements, Wavelength, Rel. Intensity, State, BEC and Det. Limit.

BEC - The BEC (Background Equivalent Concentration) is a measure of the signal-to-background ratio of a line and is a useful parameter for estimating the usefulness of a line. It is a measure of the signal-to-background ratio. BEC is calculated by determining the concentration equivalent to the background intensity, using the equation below.

BEC = Background Intensity x (Conc for Standard) ÷ (Intensity for Standard)

The BEC and the detection limit are related. In general, the lower the BEC for the line, the lower the expected detection limit will be. Sometimes, a line with lower BEC will produce better detection limits, even though it is of lower absolute intensity.

A analyst with appropriate permission may edit this field, so that it may contain information relevant to your specific instrument.

Right mouse click allows the analyst to Edit BEC and Det. Limits.

Analyst, AnalysisTools

Figure 5-94. Tools, Line Library, Right-click

Page 221: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-63

The Edit BEC and Detection Limit dialog box is shown below.

Analyst, AnalysisTools

Figure 5-96. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data

Tools, Archive Fullframe Data

Figure 5-95. Tools, Wavelength Line Library, Edit BEC and Detection Limit

Page 222: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-64 iTEVA Software Manual

Full Frames take up more space in the database than other sample types. If your database is size-restricted and is running out of space, you may archive Full Frames by moving them out of the database.

To archive Fullframe data click on Search to present the Sample Browser. Choose the required Fullframes for archive, from here you can either archive them to a local or networked hard-drive, or onto an external media source.

Analyst, AnalysisTools

Figure 5-97. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, Sample Browser

A window is presented displaying instructions to insert the archive media into the computer.

Figure 5-98. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, insert media window

Page 223: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-65

Clicking on Next presents a dialog box where the media drive and volume label can be entered, you can choose a local drive, or specify an external path at this stage.

Analyst, AnalysisTools

Figure 5-99. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, Select Drive and Volume Label

Figure 5-100. Tools, Archive Fullframe Data, finish

Clicking on Finish completes the Archive Fullframe Data operation.

Page 224: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-66 iTEVA Software Manual

Tools, Options

Analyst, AnalysisTools

Figure 5-101. Tools, Options

Options - Analyst Parameters and Sample Customer ID Defaults can be entered, as in Control Center/Tools/Options/Analyst. These pages are linked, so a change on one is reflected on the other.

Page 225: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-67

View

Analyst, AnalysisView

View

Figure 5-102. View Menu

View, Single Sample View

This shows the data for a simple sample. This example shows a report presenting the observed Units, Average, Standard deviation, RSD and the Data for each of the three analyses that were performed (the number of analyses is indicated in the method).

Note: If desired, the analyst can view spectral data (subarray) for a given element, by double clicking on the element in the analytical data field, or by using the subarray icon on the tool bar. s

Figure 5-103. View, Single Sample view

Page 226: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-68 iTEVA Software Manual

View, Multiple Sample View

This displays the data for multiple samples. When two (or more) samples are analyzed, the data for the samples can be viewed simultaneously by selecting Multiple Samples View on the View menu. An example of this data presentation is shown below.

Analyst, AnalysisView

Figure 5-104. View, Multiple Sample Presentation

View, Hide Workspace

Hides the workspace. Click again to un-hide the workspace.

Page 227: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-69

Help

Analyst, AnalysisHelp

Help

Figure 5-105. Help, About Analyst

This offers context sensitive help and instructions of how to navigate iTEVA through an index and table of contents. F1 offers help specific to the active page.

About Analyst

This displays the Thermo Scientific software version number.

Page 228: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-70 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, AnalysisSubarray Display

Subarray Display

To display the spectral data for an element wavelength, double click on the sample name, or on the element of interest in the sample workspace. The subarray can also be displayed using the Subarray icon on the Toolbar.

This plot represents the region of the CID that has been allocated to that particular element and can be used to determine if a line for a given element is free of interference from lines of other elements. The subarrays are normally examined to check for interferences and ensure that the analytical peak is covered by the central integration area (marked C on the subarray plots). Up to 16 subarrays may be overlaid in the same display. Subarrays from different methods may be overlaid on each other.

If the analyst decides to disable the left or right background point, this is done by unchecking the appropriate checkbox. Any changes made to the subarray must be enabled by clicking the Update Method button to update the results for all active samples and save the changes in the method for future use. All replicates of the sample can be seen by toggling the number in the Rep# box.

Figure 5-106. View, Subarray Plot with multiple samples displayed

Page 229: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 5-71

Analyst, AnalysisiTEVA Analysis Flags

iTEVA Analysis Flags

The following errors may be encountered during analysis:

Error Flag ReasonF The check has failed the limits set in the Check Table.W The warning limit set in the Check Table has been reached/

exceeded.> The result is above the print limits set for the method.< The result is below the print limits set for the method.? There is a calculation error associated with the result (could

be due to an invalid calibration, IEC value etc.).C The concentration is beyond the calibrated range (past

inflection point).c The concentration yields negative value (below blank

standard).z The data does not have a valid calibration associated with

it (this will happen if samples are run before a method is calibrated, unless the Output Mode is set to an option other than Concentration in Method/ Report Preferences/Output Mode).

k There is an error on an interferent line. This error is also reported if the IEC threshold has been exceeded. See Method/Element/General/IEC/Threshold.

i Interferent (overlapping Subarrays) - data can be used. This error is due to choosing two or more analytical lines that overlap with each other spectrally. Ideally, an alternate line should be chosen see Method/New and refer to the Interference Tables, or you can choose to apply an IEC correction to overcome the interference. See Method/Elements/IEC.

I Interferent (overlapping subarrays) - data cannot be used as the peaks cannot be resolved.

D The analyte peak is off the CID detector.^ The peak is saturated (data not returned).P Plasma error, the plasma was extinguished during analysis.* Global failure - NO DATA ACQUIRED. May be due to a

memory error due to too many data points.s Error on internal standard lineZ Internal standard error, normally due to an invalid

calibration or incorrectly set up internal standard reference. This flag is also displayed if an analysis is run without a valid calibration.

N The wavelength was de-selected before exposure, no data returned.

R The wavelength failed intelligent rinse test (i.e. the maximum no. of attempts was exceeded).

Page 230: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific5-72 iTEVA Software Manual

Analyst, Analysis

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 231: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-1

Chapter 6 Analyst, Sequence

Page 232: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

AnalystSequence

Page 233: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-3

Overview

A sequence is created to run a sample list, typically consisting of blanks, standards, unknowns, QC samples etc. It is possible to run a Sequence manually (New Manual) or automatically using an autosampler (New Autosampler).

A variety of autosamplers can be used with the spectrometer to automate the operation of the system and allow for the unattended analysis of samples and standards. For automated operation, the following are established:

Session - Describes all activities that should occur during the automated operation of the system, including the sequences to be run as well as any Start actions (e.g. igniting the plasma) and End actions (e.g. shutting down the plasma). A session can incorporate one or more sequences. The type of autosampler rack that is used in the automated operation is included in the Session.

Sequence - Includes the method to be used for the analysis of samples and standards, the number of samples to be analyzed.

All automated programs are generated, edited and initiated via the Sequence tab in the workspace.

Note: If desired, you can monitor the status of the system and view live data via the Analysis tab.

Once the Sequence tab has been clicked, the Menu bar will be displayed, showing the options for Auto-Session, Sequence, View and Help.

Figure 6-1. Sequence Menu Bar

Auto-Session - For creation of new sessions and modification, storage and retrieval of existing ones.

Sequence - Displays method and sample information.

View - Changes window display format and active window.

Help - Provides help information.

Note: A Session can be multiple Sequences, but a Sequence can only contain one Method.

AnalystSequence

Analyst, Sequence

Sequence Menu Bar

Page 234: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-4 iTEVA Software Manual

Auto-Session

Figure 6-2. Auto-Session Menu

The Auto-Session provides for entry of sampling method, either autosampler or manual, start-up, sequence inclusion, and shutdown actions.

Figure 6-3. Auto-Session, New Autosampler

The New Autosampler option is used to create new sessions for use with an autosampler. These can then be saved for re-use or modification.

AnalystAuto Session

Auto Session

Auto-Session, New Autosampler

Page 235: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-5

Figure 6-4. Auto-Session, New Autosampler dialog box

The figure above appears when the New Autosampler option is chosen. From here, the analyst specifies the method(s) to be used for the session and auto session parameters:

Session Type - The Automation Session dialog box provides a dropdown menu for session type. Allowed session types are autosampler or manual.

Rack type should be specified using the dropdown menu options for the chose autosampler. The autosampler type is specified at installation using Control Center/Tools/Instrument Options/Autosampler. All standard racks are available for layout by column or row - this is indicated by the Rack name e.g. CETAC ASX520 3x7 By Col Racks ...

List of Sequences to Run - Shows a list of sequences that are currently chosen to run.

Figure 6-5. New Autosampler, New Sequence dialog box

AnalystAuto Session

Page 236: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-6 iTEVA Software Manual

New - Sequences can be created by clicking on the New... button. This presents the current open method and the parameters for that methods sequence. A different method can be chosen by clicking the ... to the right of the Method name.

Sample List -

Create New List and Auto-Increment Sample name - Enter the number of samples to be run for that method, and specify the first sample name.

Import from Delimited Text File - To use the import option, the file to be imported must be located at C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\Export (or :\Users\Public\iTEVA\Export for Vista) and must be designated as a *.smp file. The analyst can rename most file formats to *.smp and it will be accepted by iTEVA. See Sequence/Autosession Tool Bar/Import Samples for more details.

The radio button to the right of the file name can be yellow or green. When it is yellow this means that it is ready to accept a sample list, when it is green it means that their is a suitable sample list in place and it has been checked to ensure that the sample list field (Sample Name) is not longer than 20 characters (as this is the maximum that the field can accept). If it is yellow, it means that either the sample list is not acceptable because the sample characters are too long, or the file format is incorrect. If the sample names are too long, iTEVA will issue a warning to advise the analyst that the names will be truncated if they proceed with the import.

Sequence Name - this name is automatically incremented, or the analyst can specify a unique name.

Sequences can be removed from the list using the Remove button which becomes active once a list is opened.

Settle Time Between Sequences - The settle time is a delay period between the loading of each sequence’s method conditions and the start of the sequence analysis. This time is used to allow the instrument to stabilize after any changes in the analytical conditions from one sequence to the next.

AnalystAuto Session

Figure 6-6. Auto Session, New Autosampler dialog box

Page 237: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-7

Preparation, Ignite Plasma - Start actions allow for plasma ignition and warm-up. In some cases, the plasma should be started immediately before the analysis. If this is desired, place a checkmark adjacent to Ignite Plasma and indicate the period of time for instrument warm up. During the Warm Up, the plasma will be set to the Post ignition defaults (see Analyst/Analysis/Instrument/ICP Control Panel).

Conclusion - The dialog box provides selection of audible alarm and duration as well as automatic shutdown after all listed sequences are complete. During the automatic shutdown, the plasma will be safely extinguished and all of the plasma gasses turned off, the optical purge will switch to trickle mode (1 L/min) and the pump will switch to nudge mode, where it moves intermittently anti clockwise to save the pump tubing. If you need to change the End Actions after a session has started, simply right click on the sequence name and choose Modify or choose Auto-Session/Modify from the File Menu.

Display - This allows the analyst to choose what is displayed in the workspace in Analyst/Analysis. For large autosampler runs, the analyst may prefer a rolling display of the last 15 samples for ease of viewing.

Once the dialog entries are completed, clicking the OK button will add the auto-session to the workspace. Highlighting the sequence in the workspace will show the Sequence Table in the display area.

Note: You can re-access the New Automation Session dialog box to change a session by right mouse click on the session name and then selecting Modify on the dropdown menu presented.

AnalystAuto Session

Auto-Session, New Manual

Figure 6-7. Auto-session MenuIt is also possible to create a session without an autosampler. This option allows the analyst to enter the sample details and specify the method as you would with a auto session. The sample names and details can be edited as in an Autosession (see Autosession/Sequence Tool Bar for details).

Page 238: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-8 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 6-8. Auto-Session, New Manual Dialog box

AnalystAuto Session

Figure 6-9. Auto-Session, New Manual prompt

The analyst must populate the new Sequence dialog box as for an Auto-Session (see Auto-Session/New Autosampler).

The analyst then starts the run as for an Auto-Session by clicking the Start icon on the toolbar. When this icon is activated, a prompt appears on screen to advise the analyst of the next action.

Page 239: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-9

Open

Opens an Open Auto-Session window, where you can open any previously saved Auto-Sessions.

Close

Closes the currently open Auto-Session and prompts the analyst to save.

Save

Auto-Session can be saved at any time by selecting Save.

Save As

An Auto-Session can be saved under a different name.

Modify

A previous, or existing session can be modified. This option also allows the analyst to modify the End Actions after the session has started.

AnalystAuto Session

Page 240: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-10 iTEVA Software Manual

This option starts the sequence. Alternatively, the icons on the toolbar can be used to start/pause/halt and stop the session.

In the workspace, open sequences appear with all the samples as specified in Sequence/Autosession/New Autosampler and calibration standards/QCs as specified in Method/Sequence Automation. Clicking on the box to the left of the method name will collapse and expand the display.

Once a session has been generated, the iTEVA window appears as shown below.

To Populate the autosampler,right click on the sequence or session and chose Auto Locate All.The Workspace describes the session(s) and sequence(s) to be performed and the Data Space describes the rack layout. If you click on the List View icon in the menu bar, a sample list is presented for the sequence. It indicates the position of each sample and analyst selected annotation information. The information in the Comment, ID fields, etc. can be edited.

AnalystAuto Session

Auto-Session, Run

Figure 6-10. The iTEVA Window Sequence Tab

Page 241: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-11

Note: Users can leave iTEVA running unattended by logging off. If an analysis is running all data will be collected under the username of the person who logged off and only that same person can log on again.

AnalystAuto Session

Figure 6-11. Sample List

If an autosampler run stops unexpectedly, there will be an error reported in the journal. Look at the Description for the Message “Autosampler Run Completed” or “Autosampler Sequence Finished Prematurely” One of the following will explain the reason.

Error text Meaning

QC Failure A QC check failed and the failure action was to Halt

Too many Re-Slope retries Re-Slope Failure action retried too many times - it has exceeded the option “MaxRe-Run Re-Slope Attempts”

Too many QC retries Re-Run QC Failure action retried too many times - it has exceeded the option “MaxRe-Run QC Attempts”

Too many Calibration retries Calibrate Failure action retried too many times - it has exceeded the option “MaxRe-Run Calibration Attempts”

QC Failure in Initial Actions A QC failure occurred in the initial actions and the option “At the end of the initial actions phase, halt sequence on any QC failure”, in the method sequence automation page, was turned on.

Autosampler Error Messages

Page 242: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-12 iTEVA Software Manual

Second QC Failure in A second QC has failed and thethe sequence option “Continue on second QC failure”

was turned off.

Calibration failure A Calibration has failed - this will occur if one of the exposures reported a problem e.g. it saturated.

Re-Slope failure A Re-Slope has failed - this will occur if one of the exposures reported a probleme.g. it saturated.

Recovery failed check If a Recovery failed its check and the failure action was set to Halt

Duplicate failed check If a Duplicate failed its check and the failure action was set to Halt .

No Re-Slope Standards defined iTEVA has been instructed toin the method perform a Re-Slope but none of

the lines in the method has Re-Slope standards defined.

Autosampler reported a failure to The Autosampler failed when move sipper asked to move the sipper probe.

Intelligent rinse - maximum The option “Intelligent Rinse Maxrinses exceeded Attempts” was exceeded. Either

the number of attempts was set too low, in which case the solution hasn’t had time to flush through the tubing (each exposure is 5 seconds by default). Or the system is contaminated.

Software error This will only occur if an Unknown or QC cannot be located. It should not happenand should be reported to Technical Support if it does.

Aborted by user The user aborted the Autosession run.

Error text Meaning

AnalystAutosampler Error Messages

Page 243: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-13

Signing Autosessions and Autosession Audit Trail

Communication Failure Communication has failed between the PC and the Instrument.

Plasma went out unexpectedly The Plasma was extinguished. There will be a separate entry in the Journal to explain the reason for this.

The following errors end the whole auto session (all sequences), irrespective of what sequence they are on:

Aborted by user

Plasma went out unexpectedly

Communication Failure

Autosampler reported a failure to move sipper.

The rest of the errors halt the sequence at that point. The next sequence then starts.

Error text Meaning

Note: This section relates specifically to the iTEVA Security package, if you do not have this version installed then the following functions will not be available on your system.

Figure 6-12. Auto-Session menu for iTEVA Security

These features enable the analyst to Sign the Autosession or look at the Audit Trail, depending on the Access Rights granted to the analyst

AnalystAutosampler Error Messages

Page 244: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-14 iTEVA Software Manual

Sign

This allows users with signatures assigned to their access rights to sign a saved copy of the Auto Session.

Figure 6-13. Auto-Session, Sign

Audit Trail

This allows all users to see the audit trail for the selected Auto Session.

Sequence

Figure 6-15. Sequence MenuThe Sequence provides entry for sample details and desired method.

AnalystAuto Session

Figure 6-14. Auto-Session, Audit Trail

Sequence

Page 245: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-15

Sequence, Add

Figure 6-16. Sequence, Add

The New Sequence dialog box appears when selecting Sequence/Add... from the Sequence menu bar, by clicking on the Add Sequence icon (see title), or by clicking on the New... button in the Auto-Session dialog box.

The New Sequence dialog box connects a saved method with a sample list.

Figure 6-17. Sequence, New Sequence

Note: A session can be multiple sequences but a sequence can only be one method.

The sample list can be created by entering the number of samples to be analyzed and a default sample name.

Alternatively, clicking on the Import from Delimited Text File radio button, enables the dropdown menu of comma-delimited text files with sample details.

AnalystSequence

Page 246: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-16 iTEVA Software Manual

The Sample list field is used to indicate the number of samples to be run and the name that you wish to assign, the sample names will be assigned in order (e.g. iTEVA1, iTEVA2, iTEVA3, iTEVA4, etc.).

The Auto-Generate Sequence Name field should be checked and initial sequence name indicated, if you want the system to assign names to each sequence in the session.

Note: It is also possible to run several sequences. Each sequence can have different methods and different plasma conditions for example. A settle time can be defined between the different sequences to allow the system sufficient time to stabilize.

Remove

Figure 6-18. Sequence, Remove

This function removes the selected sequence from the Auto Session.

Sequence Tool Bars

This tool bar is activated by clicking on the Session name in the workspace.

Figure 6-19. The Sequence Tool Bar

Add a Sequence - Accesses the new sequence dialog box.

Delete Sequence - Deletes the highlighted sequence.

List View - Toggles between sample view and autosampler rack layout view.

AnalystSequence

Sequence Tool Bar

Page 247: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-17

Run Auto Session - Starts the run. This will also connect and initialize the Autosampler.

Pause after Sample - this will pause the Auto Session after the current sample is completed. When re-selected, it resumes the Auto Session.

Halt Auto-Session - this stops the Auto Session immediately and gives the user the option of executing the End Actions.

Abort Auto Session - this aborts the Auto Session.

Connect Autosampler to PC and Initialize - connects the Autosampler and sends the probe to home.

To initiate/start a run:

1. Click the Run Autosession icon.

To halt a running sequence:

1. Click on the Halt Auto-Session menu item in the Sequence tab in Analyst.

The Sequence Conditional Halt dialog box is presented.

Figure 6-20. Halt Auto-Session dialog box

AnalystSequence

Autosession functions

Page 248: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-18 iTEVA Software Manual

2. The dialog box allows the analyst to Abort the sequence or Run sequence End Actions. A checkbox can be selected to Continue to run the next sequence.

During an auto-session:

¬ The workspace will indicate the present position of the autosampler by placing a maroon circle around the sample, standard or rinse as the respective solution is withdrawn.

¬ The level of fluid indicated in the beaker in the workspace is decreased when a given sample has been analyzed.

Note: You can monitor the progress of the session by opening the Analysis tab and view data from samples.

Auto-Locate samples and start session

When samples or standards are added to a work list, the positions in the autosampler rack must be assigned by the analyst. For a given session, right click on the session name and select Auto-Locate, for a sequence. The easiest way to do this is the Auto-Locate All command, which is on the Samples menu. This menu is accessed by right clicking on the Samples entry in the desired sequence.

Figure 6-21. Assigning Sample Positions (Right mouse click)

AnalystSequence

Page 249: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-19

If you select Auto-Locate All, each sample will be assigned a position in consecutive order starting from the first empty sample position (e.g. Sample 1 will be placed in position 1, sample 2 will be placed in position 2, etc.). Different colors are used to indicate samples for different methods.

As an alternative, you can use the Sample List to assign sample positions. In this approach, highlight the Pos ID column and enter the number. You can assign a series of numbers by dragging the cursor and entering the number in the first highlighted field, then using the Fill or Fill and Increment icons.

Once Run has been initiated, the data being currently analyzed can be viewed in Analyst, Analysis workspace until the sequence is completed. The autosampler map in Analyst, Sequence will indicate which sample is currently being analyzed.

When using Auto-Locate, the samples are placed in the first available position. The analyst can then relocate them to a different position. Go to the sample you wish to move, e.g. sample 1, click it and select un-locate using the right mouse button. The sample, position 1, now becomes vacant and the first position in the sequence on the left hand side becomes white, as no position is allocated to this sample. Only samples with allocated positions have a blue dot associated with them. Click using the left mouse button in the field you wish to place the sample and keep the left button pressed down. All available positions will now be highlighted. Drag & drop the sample into the desired autosampler field.

AnalystSequence

Figure 6-22. Auto-Locate Sample Positions

Page 250: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-20 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 6-23. Unlocate, Right mouse click

In this example, Sample U:1 unlocated, this space is now empty.

Figure 6-24. Sample U:1 position empty

AnalystSequence

Page 251: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-21

The sample has now been dragged & dropped into position 42.

It is also possible to change the position in the sample list. Enter the desired position into the position column of the required sample. Toggle the view via the icon to the autosampler and the new position for the sample will be highlighted.

Standards positions are assigned in the same manner as samples and are located in the S-x positions at the perimeter of the autosampler. When all the samples, calibration standards, QCs etc. are located, simply click on the Run Auto Session icon to start the run. This will also connect and initialize the Autosampler.

AnalystSequence

Figure 6-25. Sample relocated to position 42

Figure 6-26. Sample List showing relocation of sample position 42.

Page 252: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-22 iTEVA Software Manual

Auto Session Tool Bar

The Tool Bar is live during the creation of an Autosession and analysis to facilitate the following functions:

Add Samples

Samples can be added to a sequence (in addition to those already specified on creation of the sequence) by:

1. Clicking on the Add Samples icon on the Sample List to present the Add Samples dialog box.

Figure 6-27. The Add Samples Dialog Box

2. Indicate the number of samples to be added and the sample name.The samples are added to the bottom of the sample list. It will be necessary to assign positions in the sample rack for these new samples.

The Sample List combines the features of the rack depiction and information about the samples that is derived from the method. All fields (except the type, rack) are editable.

AnalystSequence

Figure 6-28. Sample List

Page 253: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-23

Correction Factors may be entered using the CorrFact icon which will display the dialog box below.

Figure 6-29. Sample List, Calculate Correction Factor

Similarly, Check tables and Failure Actions (that are valid for that method) are available on a sample by sample basis.

Delete Samples - deletes selected samples

Insert Recovery

Insert Duplicate

Insert Blank

AnalystSequence

Page 254: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-24 iTEVA Software Manual

Insert QC

Insert Rinse - this will insert an additional rinse as set up in Method/Sequence Automation/Autosampler

Insert Calibration

Insert Re-Slope (this option is only active if Re-Slope standards have been assigned for the method)

Fill - this fills all the highlighted cells with the same values

Fill and Increment - this increments the text in the highlighted cells ( either in the Sample name column or any of the Custom ID columns )

Export/Import Sample List

Export Sample Lists - Exports the sample labels to a comma delimited file.

Import Samples - Imports the sample labels to a comma delimited file.

The Export Sample List dialog box, which is accessed via the tool bar, is used to generate a file that contains the information as a text file, which can be imported into other applications.

The Import Sample List dialog box is similar to the Export Sample List dialog box and is used to import a list that has been stored by the export command. If the sample list that is presently active and the sample list to be imported have common positions (e.g. position 11 is used in both lists), the Import Warning dialog box will be presented and the desired option should be selected.

AnalystSequence

Page 255: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-25

Prints the Sample List

Show All Columns in List

Show Autosampler Location Information only - this option is useful for racking up samples, as it displays only sample location, type and name.

Editing a Running Autosession

If an Auto-session is started, there can be many reasons why the analyst needs to suddenly stop it e.g. a fast track sample is presented for immediate analysis new samples need to be added to the run the priority of samples needs to be changed.

The following scenarios are all easily accommodated within iTEVA as shown below:

¬ Adding a new sample for Analysis

¬ Changing the Priority of samples in an Auto Session

¬ Pausing an Auto Session to Modify the Sequence(s)

Note: The analyst can choose to pause the sequence to edit the session, or alternately, the session can be edited “live” and samples moved/added/deleted as the autosampler is running. The only sample that cannot be edited “live” is the current sample being analyzed and the next sample after it.

Adding a new sample for Analysis to an existing live Auto Session

The analyst can choose to pause the sequence to edit the session (Step 1), or alternately, the session can be edited “live” and samples moved/

AnalystSequence

Manipulating Auto Sessions

Figure 6-30. Import Warning Dialog Box

Page 256: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-26 iTEVA Software Manual

added/deleted as the autosampler is running. The only sample that cannot be edited “live” is the current sample being analyzed and the next sample after it.

Step 1 (optional for all three scenarios):

To add a new sample for analysis, the existing auto session must be halted and the new samples inserted into the autosampler table and re-saved before the Auto Session can be resumed.

Pause the sequence using the Pause icon on the toolbar

The following message will be displayed -

Step 2:

Expand the Auto session table by clicking on the + sign to display the sample id page (shown below)

Step 3:

Click the Add Samples icon (shown below)

AnalystSequence

Page 257: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-27

The following dialog box will be displayed

Enter the number of samples to be added to the run, and the sample id(s).

The new sample(s) will automatically be added to the end of the existing auto session, and will not be located – see location set to 0 (below).

Step 4:

Right click on the samples list and choose Auto-Locate All (as below) – this will assign the next available free space(s) on the autosampler for the new sample(s).

The samples will now run at the end of the sequence.

Changing the Priority of samples in an Auto Session

To re-prioritise samples, highlight the sample (as below) and keeping the mouse button depressed, move the sample up the list (it will appear as a red line – as below) by dragging and dropping

AnalystSequence

Page 258: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-28 iTEVA Software Manual

When you get to the desired position, release the mouse (as below, the new sample is now positioned to run first)

Note: Samples can only be prioritised to run after the last analyzed sample number – e.g. if you paused the auto session after sample 10, then you can only move the new sample to be run after this sample – moving it to the start of the sequence will have no effect if analysis has already begun.

The new samples are now assigned positions and are ready to run, click the Pause icon again to re-start the amended sequence.

Pausing an Auto Session to Modify the Sequence(s)

Pausing the AutoSession can be used when “live” editing is not a viable option (i.e. the modifications will take too long/the active method needs to be changed etc.)

The Pause function in iTEVA’s Sequence page can be activated at any time during a Sequence to modify the samples and positions in the autosampler racks, run a manual analysis, add or delete sequences to the Auto session.

The Pause function is activated by selecting the Pause icon.

Note: Tooltips will popup and identify the icons if the mouse is hovered over each icon.

A popup dialogue will then notify the user that iTEVA will finish the current sample then pause. The sequence can be restarted by selecting the Pause icon again.

The sample positions can be manipulated by right-clicking on a sample position in the Autosampler rack diagram and selecting to Unlocate the sample.

AnalystSequence

Page 259: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-29

There are two ways of re-locating samples - See the image below, where Sample-23 has been unlocated. From here, the analyst can type in the new location number.

Alternatively you can drag and drop the sample to a new location. Click the List View icon, to display the autosampler layout.

From here, select the unlocated sample from the left hand sample list and drag to any unused location on the autosampler. In the example below, the unlocated sample - Sample-23 (note the empty circle to denote unlocated) is selected from the left hand list and dragged to the empty location 29.

Drag and Drop Sample

AnalystSequence

Page 260: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-30 iTEVA Software Manual

The sample, Sample-23 has now been relocated to position 29.

AnalystSequence

Editing Sample Racks and Autosampler Layouts

If a different rack layout is required, or rack designation needs to be altered (e.g. to allow standards in sample positions) then this can be done by copying and editing the rack files which are held in C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\SysData

Rack files are .xls (Excel spreadsheets) as the example shows below and the columns are separated to identify the following:

¬ Type - either U (Unknown), S (Standard) or R (Rinse)

¬ Id - Sample id, usually incremental for ease of use

¬ Rack - number of the rack that the sample/standard is positioned on

¬ Row - the number of the row in the rack that the sample/standard is positioned

¬ Col - the number of the column in the rack that the sample/standard is positioned

¬ Label - this is only used to denote Standards, with S-# or S#

Page 261: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-31

The files relate in this way:

AutoSamplerConfigurationSets.xml - Contains a list of <Configuration-Set> sections. These are listed in the New Automation Session dialog.Each <ConfigurationSet> contains:

The name of the .xls file it will use

The name of the <Configuration> section in AutosamplerConfigurations.xml.

If you add or change a <ConfigurationSet> then the corresponding items need to exist:AutosamplerConfigurations.xml - this contains a list of <Configuration> sections.Each <Configuration> contains:

The name of autosampler it works with e.g.: <AutosamplerMachine>CETAC

EXR-8</AutoSamplerMachine>

Various settings for telling the sipper probe where to go

A list of <Rack> items. Each one has a type=“RackName” part, this should correspond to a <RackDefinition type = “RackName”> in AutoSamplerRacks.xml

AnalystSequence

Page 262: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-32 iTEVA Software Manual

To preserve original files, copy AutosamplerConfigurations.xml, AutosamplerConfigurationSets.xml, AutoSamplerRacks.xml and any .xls which are going to be edited to

C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\Autosamp first and then make any changes to them in situ. That way if anything goes wrong, the existing ones will remain in

C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\SysData. All changes described below should be made to the files in

C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\Autosamp

To Edit a Rack Layout -

1. Find and open the required file e.g. CETAC 6 x 15 Map.xls

2. Change the required fields. For example to designate an Unknown Position as a Standard, change the Type from a U to an S.

3. Save the file with a new name to differentiate from the original file e.g. CETAC 6 x 15 Map (2).xls

4. Open the file AutosamplerConfigurations.xml (if you open with Notepad, this will allow you to edit the program)

5. Find and copy the entire section (paste the new section below the original) that relates to the autosampler rack files that have been changed, and change the <Configuration name = ... > field to the saved .xls file name (without the .xls extension) e.g. “CETAC 6 x 15 Map (2)”. Save the file with the new change.

6. Open the file AutosamplerConfigurationSets.xml (if you open with Notepad, this will allow you to edit the program)

7. Find and copy the entire section that relates to the autosampler rack files that have been changed, and change the following:

AnalystSequence

Page 263: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 6-33

<ConfigurationSet Name = ...> field to the saved .xls file name (without the .xls extension) e.g. CETAC 6 x 15 Map (2) and save the file. <MapFile> ... to the name of the saved .xls <Configuration> ... to the name of the saved configuration as above in Step 5.

NOTE: The updated .xml files must be copied into the into the Autosamp folder at C:\Program Files\Thermo\iTEVA\Autosamp. This ensures that if a software upgrade is performed, the updated .xml files are not lost, as these files in the sysdata folder will be replaced by what’s on the update cd, whilst files in the autosamp folder are preserved. Files in the Autosamp folder take priority over those in Sysdata.

Page 264: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific6-34 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Page 265: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific 7-1

Chapter 7 Publisher

Page 266: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

PublisherPublisher

Page 267: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 7-3

Publisher

Overview

The Publisher window is used to establish the format of the analytical report and obtain reports that describe multiple samples.

Figure 7-1. The Publisher Window

Publisher is a stand-alone application. The analyst can access the database, create a report, select print format, etc.

The analyst can select the nature of the report (i.e. report of the concentration of the elements of interest in various samples) and select the samples for which the report is to be generated.

Publisher is incorporated into the iTEVA program to generate multi-sample reports and is accessed from the iTEVA Control Center. When Publisher is opened, the Publisher window is presented.

Publisher is based on Crystal Report format templates. It enables the analyst to interrogate the database and to format it into a template. There are a number of templates supplied to the analyst.

Select Report/New

Figure 7-2 Report/New file menu

This will open the following dialog box:

PublisherPublisher

To create a new report:

Page 268: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-4 iTEVA Software Manual

Figure 7-3 Report/New dialog box

From here, select the required report template (each option is explained in detail further on) by double clicking on the name. This action will open the Sample Query dialog box.

Enter the criteria that you want to use to select data files for the presentation and click Search.

The Sample Browser dialog box, which lists all of the samples that met the search criteria, will be presented.

Select the files that you want to include in the report. When you have selected the desired files, click the OK button on the bottom of the dialog box.

This will present the report in the main section of the Publisher screen.There are a number of common features to each report which will be presented alongside the report:

PublisherPublisher

Figure 7-4. Publisher, Sample Browser dialog box

Page 269: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 7-5

Report Customization

The General tab allows the report author to customize the Report Title, Report Author, and to add any relevant Notes. The notes will all appear at the top of the first page of the report. These fields can be edited until the report is saved. Select Ok to activate changes on the active report. This tab will auto hide unless the pin icon is selected, which will leave it open. Select to close the tab completely.

Report Explorer

This tab presents the view of all open reports. This tab will auto hide unless the pin icon is selected, which will leave it open. Select to close the tab completely.

PublisherPublisher

Figure 7-5. Report Customization

Figure 7-6. Report Explorer

Page 270: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-6 iTEVA Software Manual

Report

Figure 7-7. Report Menu

Report/New

Opens the Report/New dialog box

Report/Open

Opens an existing saved report from its default or a user specified location

Report/Save

Saves the active report to a default or a user specified location

Report/Print

Prints the active report

Report/Export

Exports the active report to a default or a user specified location. There are various options when exporting a report, as shown below

Figure 7-8. Export Options

Report/Create Custom TemplateThis option allows the analyst to create/edit any report and save it as a template for future use. It is especially applicable to the Flexible Report by Sample template which has many analyst definable options.

PublisherPublisher

Page 271: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 7-7

Help

Help, Publisher

Searches the on line help section which is specific to Publisher

Help, Search

Searches the help files

Help, Contents

Navigates to the Contents library of the on line help

Help, Index

Navigates to the Contents library of the on line help

Help, About

Details the version of Publisher being accessed

Figure 7-10. Tool Bar

Report Explorer

The first icon opens the Report Explorer tab for the active report.

Report/Exit

Exits the active report and Publisher application. If the active report is not saved, a prompt will be offered to save the report before exiting

Tools

Figure 7-9. Tools Menu

Reuse Existing Sample List - This enables the analyst to re-use the same sample list for several templates, without going through the sample search criteria process again. When this option is active, a tick will appear beside the list option.

PublisherPublisher

Tools

Page 272: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-8 iTEVA Software Manual

PublisherPublisher

Save

This icon saves the active report. A standard windows Save As dialog box is presented to save the active report to a default or a user specified location

Print

Prints the active report

Export

Exports the active report to a default or a user specified location. There are various options when exporting a report

Report Parameters

Presents the Report Customization tab for the active report.

A common tool bar (below) is presented when a report is opened/created.

Toggle Group Tree This icon displays the report tree, this is grouped differently according to the report open, i.e. for a simple sample report, it will display the sample names with the option to select and display a particular element in that sample

The next series of arrows allow the user to move through a multiple page report by progressing to the next page or the last/first page in the report

Go to Page This text field indicates to the analyst, which page of the report that they are currently viewing. By typing in the white section and pressing return, it will move the report to the desired page.

Report Tool Bar

Page 273: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 7-9

PublisherPublisher

Find Text This option opens a Find Text dialog box, which allows the analyst to search the report for a specific word/character/number.

Zoom On selecting this option, the analyst is presented with a variety of options to zoom into the report.

This report is fully analyst customizable to contain as little or as much information on the sample, method and autosession of the selected samples.

When the report opens, a Report Customization tab will also appear in the left hand margin. This contains three sections: General, Method Data and Result Data.

Figure 7-11. Report Customization Tab

GeneralThe General is the same as for all other reports and allows the analyst to customize the Report Title, Author and Notes. Select Ok to activate changes on the active report. This tab will auto hide unless the pin icon is selected, which will leave it open. Select to close the tab completely.

Flexible Report By Sample

Page 274: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-10 iTEVA Software Manual

PublisherPublisher

Figure 7-13. Result Data Tab

Method Data

This tab offers the analyst the option to customise the Method Data that is reported. Each check box may be enabled or disabled as required. Where a section exists with a heading i.e. Method and Sequence, unchecking the Method and Sequence check box will disable all of the options in that section. Select Ok to activate changes on the active report. This tab will auto hide unless the pin icon is selected, which will leave it open. Select to close the tab completely.

Figure 7-12. Method Data tab

Result Data

This tab offers the analyst the option to customise the Result Data that is reported. Each check box may be enabled or disabled as required. Where a section exists with a heading i.e. RAW CTS/S, unchecking the RAW CTS/S check box will disable all of the options in that section. Select Ok to activate changes on the active report. This tab will auto hide unless the pin icon is selected, which will leave it open. Select to close the tab completely.

Page 275: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 7-11

PublisherPublisher

This report displays the data in a table format, and contains the following information (in addition to the Report Customization/General section): sample acquisition date and time, sample name, method name, element name and average value.

Note: The .csv file export option is not available for this report. ▲

This report displays the Intensity Ratio value for the samples selected. It contains the following information (in addition to the Report Customization/General section): sample name, method name, method revision, analyst name, sample acquisition date and time, element name, average value, units, standard deviation, % rsd and intensity ratio.

This report displays the Method Detection limit value for the sample(s) selected. It contains an additional option in the Report Customization/General section which allows the analyst to select the Confidence Level for the MDL calculation - this can be set to 99, 98 or 95%. The default value is 98%.

Figure 7-16. Report Customization for MDL report

Horizontal Table Report

Figure 7-14. Horizontal Table Report

Intensity Report

Figure 7-15. Intensity Report

Method Detection Limit

Page 276: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-12 iTEVA Software Manual

PublisherPublisher

Also contained in the report is the element name, MDL, correction factor, sample weight, nominal weight, initial volume, final volume, adjustment factor, aliquot count, degrees of freedom, student T value, standard deviation, confidence level, method name, method revision, analyst name, sample name, average value, units, standard deviation, % rsd and sample acquisition date and time.

To generate an MDL report, choose the D.L. samples that you have analysed - these are normally multiple replicates of a blank or diluted unknown sample. The MDL report will generate the MDL for each element in the method based on the average of the standard deviations of the selected samples, and the confidence level selected by the analyst.

This report displays a trend chart for QC samples, this chart includes the values from the appropriate Check Tables and charts them for easy viewing of failures and warnings. It contains the following information (in addition to the Report Customization/General section): QC trend chart, table below contains the sample name, sample acquisition date and time, method name (version), average value, units, outcome (pass/fail), check units, check value, high and low warning and failure limits.

Figure 7-17. Method Detection Limit Report

QC Trend Chart

Figure 7-18. QC Trend Chart

Page 277: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 7-13

PublisherPublisher

The Relative Standard Deviation (RSD) can be displayed graphically in a chart with details in a table below for the elements contained in the sample(s).

This report displays the relative standard deviation (RSD) value on a chart for the sample(s) selected. It contains the following information (in addition to the Report Customization/General section): analyst name, instrument name, instrument serial number, method name and method revision.

The table below lists the sample name, sample acquisition date and time, method name (revision) and %RSD.

RSD Trend Chart

Figure 7-19. RSD Trend Chart

Page 278: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-14 iTEVA Software Manual

PublisherPublisher

The sample report displays the elements Measured, the Average, Standard Deviation and %RSD for the selected samples. It contains the following information (in addition to the Report Customization/General section): sample name, sample acquisition date and time, sample type, correction factor, sample weight, nominal weight, initial volume, final volume, adjustment factor, analyst name, method name, method revision, element name, average value, units, standard deviation and % RSD.

Sample Report

Figure 7-20. Sample Report

Simple Sample Report

Figure 7-21. Simple Sample Report

This is the simplest format for reporting the data which contains in addition to the Report Customization/General section): sample name, sample acquisition date and time, sample type, method name, method revision, analyst name, units, element name, average value, units, std dev and % RSD.

Page 279: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 7-15

Trend Chart

Figure 7-22. Trend Chart

This report displays a trend chart for samples, this chart includes the values from the selected samples. It contains the following information (in addition to the Report Customization/General section): analyst name, instrument name, instrument serial number, trend chart, table below contains the sample name, sample acquisition date and time, method name (revision number), average value and units.

This report shows the data in a vertical table. It contains the following information (in addition to the Report Customization/General section): sample name, sample acquisition date and time, analyst name, method name (revision number) and average value.

Note: The .csv file export option is not available for this report. ▲

Vertical Table Report

Figure 7-23. Vertical Table Report

PublisherPublisher

Page 280: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific7-16 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

PublisherPublisher

Page 281: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-1

Chapter 8 iTEVA Security

Data security is paramount in any laboratory these days and the ultimate assurance of credible audit trails and method logs is found in iTEVA Security, designed to allow the analyst to maintain their data in a 21 CFR, Part 11 compliant manner.

Introduction

Page 282: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-2 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

iTEVA Security

Page 283: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-3

In 1991, members of the pharmaceutical industry met with Food and Drug Administration (FDA) to determine how they could accommodate paperless record systems under the current good manufacturing practice (CGMP) regulations in parts 210 and 211 (21 CFR parts 210 and 211). The FDA created a Task Force on Electronic Identification/Signatures to develop a uniform approach by which the agency could accept electronic signatures and records. The end result was the creation and implementation of FDA Rule 21 CFR, Part 11.

The United States government Food and Drug Administration (FDA) department ruling on Electronic Records and Electronic Signatures (21 CFR 11) states that “the regulations in this part set forth the criteria under which the agency considers electronic records, electronic signatures, and hand-written signatures executed to electronic records to be trustworthy, reliable, and generally equivalent to paper records and hand-written signatures executed on paper”. The ruling further states that “This part applies to records in electronic form that are created, modified, maintained, archived, retrieved, or transmitted, under any records requirements set forth in agency regulations”.

The final ruling was published on March 20, 1997 and has been in effect since August 20th, 1997.

iTEVA Security limits access to certain features and functionality, to only those users who have been granted the right to do so by an administrator, as set in the Security Administration program in accordance with CFR 11.10 - “Use of authority checks to ensure that only authorised individuals can use the system, electronically sign a record, access the computer system input or output device, alter a record or perform the operation at hand”. See the Access Control section for more details.

iTEVA Security uses a combination of user names and passwords as defined in CFR 11.200,to “Employ at least two distinct identification components such as an identification code and password” and also “to ensure that only authorized individuals can use the system, electronically sign a record, access the operation or computer system input or output device, alter a record, or perform the operation at hand” Subpart C, section 11.300. All users must have a unique login name and password to access the system. Microsoft Windows XP authentication is used to check the validity of the user, as this is the platform for iTEVA. See the User Login and Authentication section for further details. In addition, the level of access to the system is controlled via an Access Rights assignment that is established in the

Background

What is 21 CFR Part 11?

Access Control

User Login and Authentication

iTEVA Security

Page 284: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-4 iTEVA Software Manual

Security Administration program. See the Access Rights section for further details.

In iTEVA Security, the following are treated as electronic records for the purposes of 21 CFR 11- Samples, Methods and Autosessions. These records are protected from tampering and deletion and any changes that are made to them is maintained in the Audit Trail. See the Electronic Records section for more details.

Signatures can be applied to Methods, Samples and Autosessions at any time. The Signature will appear in the Audit Trail for that particular record. Administrators can disable the signatures, edit them and create new ones as required. See the Electronic Signatures section for further details.

iTEVA Security provides integrated auditing facilities so that data can be checked and validated as described in section 11.10 paragraph (b): “The ability to generate accurate and complete copies of records in both human readable and electronic form suitable for inspection, review, and copying…”.

Methods, Samples and Autosessions have full audit trails associated with them to track the progress of data from creation and editing through to review and final approval.

Whenever a change is made to the data, iTEVA Security adds that change to the audit trail. The change is noted, and the previous value, new value, operator and the date/time is recorded. See the Audit Trails section for further details.

Events that can affect data validity (such as unauthorized attempts to use iTEVA or data deletion) are recorded in the event logs provided by the Windows operating system (see the Event Logs section for further details)

iTEVA Security

Electronic Records

Electronic Signatures

Audit Trails

Event Log

Page 285: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-5

iTEVA Security limits access to certain features and functionality to only those users who have been granted the right to do so by an administrator, as set in the Security Administration program in accordance with 21 CFR 11.10 - “Use of authority checks to ensure that only authorised individuals can use the system, electronically sign a record, access the computer system input or output device, alter a record or perform the operation at hand”.

Access Rights are assigned in the Security Administration program and allow Administrators to control how users have access to various functions in iTEVA. ( See the Security Administration User’s Guide for full details )

Run iTEVA SecurityUsers with this right are able to log in to the iTEVA client software.

Edit System SettingsUsers with this right are able to make changes to any of the parameters that appear on the options and instrument options pages in the iTEVA client software, including the right to run the Database Wizard. In a stand-alone configuration (client and server installed on the same computer), this allows the user to create analytical databases and to attach and detach them on SQL Server Express.

Access Control

Figure 8-1. iTEVA Access Control Window

iTEVA SecurityAccess Control

Page 286: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-6 iTEVA Software Manual

Note: It is strongly recommended, that in a regulated environment, this access right is only granted to those users who also have the right to administer security settings i.e. users who can run the Security administration software. This is because a user who creates an analytical database is, by default, the ‘owner’ of that database, and this confers certain privileges such as the ability to make uncontrolled edits to the contents of the database, from outside the controlled environment of the iTEVA. ▲

Security software

Users must have this right to be able to perform a firmware upgrade to the iCAP instrument. Users with this right are able to change the default plasma conditions that are set following plasma ignition (post ignition conditions). Users with this right are able to archive Full Frame sample data to a file that is separate from the analytical database, thereby removing it from the analytical database. Users with this right are able to copy analytical methods and results between databases and to delete methods and samples from analytical databases. The ability to copy and delete samples, also requires the Edit Samples access right to be granted.

Edit Map Database

Allows the user to add new elements to the line library, edit existing wavelengths and make them available for analysis.

Edit Methods

Users with this right are able to create and edit analytical methods.

Edit Samples

Users with this right are able to make changes to sample data after the sample has been collected, such as deleting repeats, changing the regions of interest (central and background points), recalculating the sample with a different concentration factor or changing the sample identification.

Edit Sequences

Users with this right are able to create and edit sequence automation sessions (auto-sessions). This includes the ability to add or delete samples from the auto-session.

Create Reports

Users with this right are able to create analytical reports using the Publisher application.

Override Method Parameters on ‘Run sample’ dialogues

Users with this right are able to override some of the method parameters, such as the number of repeats and sample flush time when running samples. In a regulated environment, routine users would not ordinarily have this right granted as it allows samples to be collected under conditions that are not reflected in the method, thus removing traceability between the sample and the method. However, for those

iTEVA SecurityAccess Control

Page 287: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-7

users involved in method development, it is often useful to be able to quickly override these parameters between samples at run time, without having to perform the normal method edit/save process.

This allows method development where options can be changed sample to sample, rather than having to edit the method parameters each time.

In order to simplify administration of access control rights, users should be granted rights based on their individual identity (as confirmed by user authentication) and upon membership of groups. This allows an administrator to create named groups, such as ‘iTEVA users’, ‘lab managers’ or ‘iTEVA administrators’ etc. with specified access rights, and to assign group membership to individual users. Users may be members of any number of groups and each user’s access rights are an accumulation of rights assigned specifically to the user and from their group membership (this is how the Windows security model operates).

Access rights, signature meanings and policy settings are read from the security server by iTEVA at start-up. Any changes that are made in the Security Administration software require that the user log out of iTEVA and back in again in order to refresh.

The access rights that are displayed in Control Center/Tools/Options and reflect an accumulation of rights that exist for the current user. This section is not editable from iTEVA and is provided for information only. Any changes to access rights must be made by an administrator or equivalent in the separate Security Administration program.

Figure 8-2. iTEVA Access Rights Window

iTEVA SecurityAccess Control

Granting Access Rights

Viewing the current User’s Access Rights

Page 288: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-8 iTEVA Software Manual

21 CFR 11 stipulates the following rule for user authentication: “Employ at least two distinct identification components such as an identification code and password”.

This is satisfied by the Windows Authentication system. Users log onto iTEVA Security using their Windows user names and passwords.

In addition the iTEVA Security system complies with the following conditions, stipulated by 21 CFR 11:

¬ The password associated with a user name will be created and managed by the user and will be known only to the user in accordance with CFR 11.200 - “…be administered and executed to ensure the attempted use of an individuals electronic signature by anyone other than its genuine owner requires collaboration of two or more individuals”. This is satisfied by the Windows Authentication system. The user administers their own password using the built-in windows features.

¬ The system ensures that the user name will be unique within the context of the closed system on which iTEVA Security is running in accordance with CFR 11.100 - “Each electronic signature shall be unique to one individual and shall not be reused by or reassigned to anyone else”. The users are maintained by the Windows administrator, this means that the user-names must be unique. Each user-name is also associated with a full name which additionally identified each user.

¬ Administrators must be able to enforce a password “policy” that defines the following aspects of password behaviour :

¬ Automatic expiry after a specified duration e.g. 60 days. ¬ Minimum password length ¬ Prevent recycling of previously used passwords ¬ Lock out a user after a specified number of failed retries ¬ in accordance with CFR 11.300 - “..ensuring that

identification code and password issuance’s are periodically checked, recalled or revised”.

These stipulations are accomplished using the built-in windows system policy settings. The Windows administrator sets up these settings when creating each Windows user.

iTEVA Security authenticates users on start-up by asking for the user’s windows user-name and password.

If authentication fails, iTEVA will report an error and return the user to the login screen, in addition an event will be written to that effect.

After a successful authentication and start-up of Control Centre, the user name of the logged in user will be displayed in the status bar in Control Centre and Analyst.

iTEVA SecurityElectronic Records

iTEVA Security Login Process

User Login and Authentication

Page 289: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-9

iTEVA SecurityElectronic Signatures

Electronic Signatures

Electronic Records In iTEVA Security, Samples, Methods and Autosessions are treated as electronic records for the purposes of 21 CFR 11.

¬ Every user operation that creates or modifies an electronic record is logged in the audit trail for that record. This records the changes made to that record.

¬ Electronic signatures may be applied to electronic records, which are stored as entries in the audit trail for that record.

¬ Methods that are exported from iTEVA are checksummed and can only be re-imported if they are unaltered.

Protection of Electronic Records

In order to ensure the integrity of electronic records, they are protected against any modification by unauthorized users and against modification by authorised users in an uncontrolled manner, for example by using applications other than iTEVA Security.

The iTEVA Security system employs the following controls:

¬ In SQL Server, unauthorized changes are prevented from happening by using Windows authorization and the use of ‘application roles’. This prevents users from editing electronic records using applications other than iTEVA.

¬ Unauthorized changes, should they occur, are detected by using a sophisticated checksumming algorithm which causes the data to be invalidated and unable to be used by iTEVA Security.

¬ Unauthorized users are prevented from editing electronic records within iTEVA Security. All users are checked by the Security Administration program when using the features in iTEVA Security.

¬ iTEVA Security is unable to connect to and read data from databases created by iTEVA. It is not possible to copy data between iTEVA databases and ITEVA Security databases. This prevents non-audited data from being present in an iTEVA Security system.

There is a specific requirement in The FDA’s 21 CFR part 11 document relating to Electronic signatures as follows:

“Electronic signatures and hand written signatures executed to electronic records shall be linked to their respective electronic records to ensure that the signatures cannot be excised, copied, or otherwise transferred to falsify an electronic record by ordinary means.”

Each user or group may be granted a different list of Signature meanings they may be allowed to use. This is setup in the Security Administration program, using the Signature meanings menu. In addition – certain groups or individuals may be denied the right to sign.

Page 290: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-10 iTEVA Software Manual

Requirements for and Applying Electronic Signatures to Electronic Records

¬ Usernames and passwords are the analyst's Windows username and password. This ensures that signatures are guaranteed to be unique within the context of the closed system that iTEVA Security is running under.

¬ The first signing in a controlled session (iTEVA log on) requires both signature components, subsequent signings only require the password.

Figure 8-3. New Users Window

Figure 8-4. Default Signatures

iTEVA SecurityElectronic Signatures

New Users are added using the Add/Remove toggle bars, or by typing the user name in the text field.

There are default signatures as shown or custom signatures and meanings can be added if required, using the Add, Delete or Edit options.

Page 291: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-11

¬ Once all the components of a signature have been provided, iTEVA Security will authenticate the user and check that the user has been granted the right to sign records. If successful it will then retrieve the users full name and the system date and time and will insert these into a new ‘electronic signature’ entry in the record’s audit trail in accordance with CFR 11.50

- “Signed electronic records shall contain information associated with the signing that clearly indicates all of the following :

• (1) The printed name of the signer;

• (2) The date and time when the signature was executed; and

• (3) The meaning (such as review, approval, responsibility or authorship) associated with the signature.”

¬ The list of available signatures is access controlled for each individual user.

¬ Only the currently logged on Windows user can sign records (as displayed in the status bar).

¬ After the permitted number of failed authentication retries, a user may be locked out of Windows, as defined by the password policy in force.

¬ For records stored in the analytical database, electronic signatures may only be applied to records that have not been edited since last being saved to disk. This ensures that the signature appears in the audit trail after any other audit trail entries which may log edits to the record.

¬ An electronic signature may be applied to samples irrespective of whether or not the samples were collected as part of a sequence and may be applied either to individual samples, to an entire sequence or to a user selected subset of the samples belonging to a method in the analysis workspace.

¬ The ability to apply signatures is limited to only those authorised users to whom this right has been granted by an administrator. Signatures can be applied only by the currently logged on user.

¬ If a signed record is subsequently edited, an audit trail entry for the edit will appear after the signature and so it will be possible to observe which edits occurred after signing.

¬ It is not possible to revoke a signature (i.e. remove it from the

iTEVA SecurityElectronic Signatures

Page 292: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-12 iTEVA Software Manual

audit trail) or edit or delete any of the component parts of the signature

¬ Electronic signatures will be linked to their respective records via the controls described in the section ‘Protection of Electronic Records’ which both prevent and detect any attempts at unauthorized or uncontrolled editing of records in accordance with CFR 11.70 - “Electronic signatures and hand written signatures executed to electronic records shall be linked to their respective electronic records to ensure that the signatures cannot be excised, copied, or otherwise transferred to falsify an electronic record by ordinary means.”

¬ Electronic signatures can be viewed and reported as part of the audit trail to which they belong.

Applying Signatures to samples,methods and autosessions

The following records can be signed in iTEVA Security - Methods, AutoSessions and Samples ( Unknowns, Calibration Standards, Fullframes, Blanks and Timescans ).

Sign Sample

Figure 8-5. Sign Sample Window

Allows users to Sign the Sample with their assigned signatures. The same dialog box is presented when signing Unknowns, Calibration Standards, Fullframes, Blanks and Timescans.

Sign Method

Figure 8-6. Sign Method Window

iTEVA SecurityElectronic Signatures

Page 293: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-13

This option allows users with signature access rights to sign the method using the dialog shown below.

Sign Autosession

Figure 8-7. Sign Autosession Window This allows users with signatures assigned to their access rights to sign a saved copy of the Auto Session.

iTEVA Security maintains secure audit trails for the electronic records: Samples, Methods and Autosessions.

The image below shows the audit entries generated during a single save of the method blank test. It shows the changes made to the previous revision of the method.

Audit Trail entries contain the following:

¬ The type of event being audited, which will be one of : Creation, Change, Deletion, Electronic Signature.

¬ The date and time that the record was modified. In the case of a networked computer that belongs to a domain, this is the date and time of the system clock on the network server.

Audit Trails

Figure 8-8. Audit Trail Window

iTEVA SecurityAudit Trail

Page 294: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-14 iTEVA Software Manual

¬ The user name and the full name of the user who was logged in when the record was modified.

¬ The name of the computer the user was logged in to, which in the case of a networked computer that belongs to a Windows Domain will include the name of the Windows Domain to which it belongs.

¬ A description of the event, which will be appropriate to the type of the event.

¬ For a ‘Record Edit’ the description contains an indication of which attribute was edited and both the old value and new value of that attribute.

¬ The version number of the iTEVA Security software that the auditable event was performed by.

For records copied to another database, the audit trail will contain a Created event and the name of the database from where it was copied.

Deleting a revision of the record from the database will not cause the audit trail entries for that revision of the record to be deleted, as these entries may form part of the audit trail for subsequent revisions of the record which remain stored.

Show Parents ( Methods and Samples )The default view in the AuditTrail dialog is to show the Audit Trail entries only for the current revision. If you wish to see the entries for all the revisions this one was based on then check this checkbox.

iTEVA SecurityAudit Trail

Page 295: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-15

iTEVA Security logs significant system events in a secure event log. For the most part these correspond to the events that are currently logged in the iTEVA Journal (Control Center/Journal).

Viewing the Event Log

The events are stored in the windows event log of the PC which is running the Security Administration software. In the case of a networked computer this may be separate to the computer running iTEVA Security and in fact may be storing the events logged from multiple computers.

To view the event log run the windows Event Viewer. The iTEVA Events are stored in the “Thermo Electron” log.

Each event log entry contains the following fields of information about the event : event ID, date & time, username of logged in user, name of originating computer, name of originating application, event classification (information / warning / error) and event description.

When viewing the event log it is possible to filter and search on each of the information fields by double clicking on the column header.

iTEVA SecurityEvent Log

Figure 8-9. Event Viewer Window

Figure 8-10. Event Properties Window

Event Logs

Page 296: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-16 iTEVA Software Manual

The event log duplicates all iTEVA errors as logged locally in the Journal (Control Center/Journal). The events that are logged include successful and failed authentication attempts and errors. If the administrator desires, then information type journal entries may also be sent to the Event log. In Security Administration, go to the System Policies section and see “Audit Information Events”. This can be applied or denied to individual users or groups of users.

In Security Administration, the System Policies section allows the Administrator to Audit Information Events by checking the tick box. This can be applied or denied to certain users or groups of users.

When records (samples/methods/auto sessions) are deleted from an analytical database, the deletion event is logged in the event log as deleting the sample deletes it audit trail from the database, so the record of the data existence is held in the event log.

Security AdministrationAny changes made to the Security Administration are stored in the event log.

iTEVA SecurityInformation Events

Information Events

Deleted Samples, Methods and Autosessions

Figure 8-11. Security Administration Window

Page 297: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-17

iTEVA SecuritySigning Samples

Note: This section relates specifically to the iTEVA Security package, if you do not have this version installed then the following functions will not be available on your system.

Right clicking on a single sample produces the menu below with the options of Sign Sample and Audit Trail.

Sign Sample

Figure 8-12. Sign Sample Window

Allows users to Sign the Sample with their assigned signatures.

Audit TrailDisplays the Audit Trail for the sample. This details any change that has been made to the sample since creation and clearly shows the old, and new value for that change. The Show Parents checkbox allows all details of the sample to be shown, e.g. if a repeat is deleted and then the sample

Signing Samples and Sample Audit Trails

Page 298: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-18 iTEVA Software Manual

resaved, there will be a new audit trail for the newly saved sample.....by checking Show Parents the audit trail will display the origin of the sample.

Sign Selected SamplesRight clicking on the method name in the Analysis workspace displays the menu below with the additional option to Sign Selected Samples. This functions in the same way as signing a single sample except that it applies the signature to all samples selected (selected samples are denoted with a green checkmark to the left of the sample icon, this can be toggled on and off to select/deselect).

Figure 8-13. Sign Audit Trail Window

iTEVA SecuritySigning Samples

Page 299: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-19

iTEVA SecuritySigning Methods

Signing Methods and Method Audit Trail

Note: This section relates specifically to the iTEVA Security package, if you do not have this version installed then the following functions will not be available on your system.

Method, Sign MethodThis option allows users with signature access rights to sign the method using the dialog shown below.

Figure 8-14. Sign Method Window

Method, Audit Trail

This option displays the method Audit Trail which details all the changes in the method since creation (see example below)

Figure 8-15. Sign Method, Audit Trail Window

Page 300: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-20 iTEVA Software Manual

Signing Autosessions and Autosession Audit Trail

Note: This section relates specifically to the iTEVA Security package, if you do not have this version installed then the following functions will not be available on your system.

Figure 8-16. Auto-Session menu for iTEVA Security

These features enable the analyst to Sign the Autosession or look at the Audit Trail, depending on the Access Rights granted to the analyst.

Sign

This allows users with signatures assigned to their access rights to sign a saved copy of the Auto Session.

Figure 8-17. Auto-Session, Sign

iTEVA SecuritySigning Autosessions

Page 301: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual 8-21

Audit Trail

This allows all users to see the audit trail for the selected Auto Session.

Figure 8-18. Auto-Session, Audit Trail

iTEVA SecuritySigning Autosessions

Page 302: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific8-22 iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

iTEVA Security

Page 303: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual I

IndexA

Access Control ......................................................................... 8-3Access Control ......................................................................... 8-5Accessory ............................................................................... 2-28Active Method, Workspace ................................................. 5-30Add a New Connection ......................................................... 2-23Analysis Maximum Integration Times ................................ 4-15Analysis Preferences ............................................................ 4-13Analyst Window ....................................................................... 3-3Analyst, Analysis ...................................................................... 5-3Analyst, Method ....................................................................... 4-3Analyst, Sequence ................................................................... 6-3Attach....................................................................................... 2-20Audit Trails .............................................................................. 8-13Audit Trails ................................................................................ 8-4Auto Session ............................................................................. 6-4Automated Output .................................................................. 4-21Automated Output, Standards ............................................. 4-23Automated Output, Unknowns ............................................. 4-21Autosampler Error messages .............................................. 6-11Autosampler............................................................................ 2-27Autosampler............................................................................ 4-42Autosession functions........................................................... 6-17Auto-Session, New Manual ................................................... 6-7Auto-Session,New Autosampler ........................................... 6-4

B, C, D

Background............................................................................... 8-3Backup ..................................................................................... 2-21Calibration Mode.................................................................... 4-16Calibration ............................................................................... 5-27Change Active Connection ................................................... 2-25Check Type, Duplicate ........................................................... 4-35Check Type, Limit Check ....................................................... 4-34Check Type, QC ....................................................................... 4-31Check Type, Recovery ........................................................... 4-33Checks. .................................................................................... 4-28Continuing Actions................................................................. 4-38Continuing Actions, Failure options .................................... 4-42Conventions .............................................................................. 1-6Copy Methods/Results .......................................................... 2-25Create a new Method.............................................................. 4-4Create New Database ........................................................... 2-21Create....................................................................................... 2-20Database Info ......................................................................... 2-20Database Upgrades ............................................................... 2-26Database Wizard.................................................................... 2-18Deleted Samples, Methods and Autosessions ................. 8-16Deleting/Exporting/Importing Databases .......................... 2-25 Deleting a Database .............................................................. 2-25Detach...................................................................................... 2-20

E

Editing/Deleting a Connection ............................................. 2-26Electronic Records .................................................................. 8-4Electronic Records .................................................................. 8-9Electronic Signatures ............................................................. 8-4Electronic Signatures .............................................................. 8-9Elements .................................................................................. 4-56Elements, Fit ............................................................................ 4-63Elements, General .................................................................. 4-57Elements, IEC .......................................................................... 4-75Elements, Standards.............................................................. 4-60Elements, Subarray................................................................ 4-77Enable Drain Sensor .............................................................. 2-28End Actions ............................................................................. 4-40Event Log ................................................................................... 8-4Event Logs ............................................................................... 8-15Exporting/Importing a Database from/to another iCAP ... 2-26

F, G, H

Feature request / Incident form ........................................... 2-28File .............................................................................................. 2-4File, Exit ...................................................................................... 2-6File, Journal Print Preview ..................................................... 2-5File, Log Off................................................................................ 2-4File, Log On ................................................................................ 2-4File, Page Setup........................................................................ 2-5File, Print Journal ..................................................................... 2-5File, Print Setup ........................................................................ 2-5Flexible Report by Sample ...................................................... 7-9

Global QC Properties ............................................................. 4-40Granting Access Rights .......................................................... 8-7

Help .......................................................................................... 2-28Help .......................................................................................... 4-95Help .......................................................................................... 5-69Help, About iTEVA .................................................................. 2-30Help, Help Topics ................................................................... 2-28Horizontal Table Report ......................................................... 7-11

I

Information Events ................................................................. 8-16Initial Actions .......................................................................... 4-37Instrument ............................................................................... 5-54Intensity Report ...................................................................... 7-11Internal Standards ................................................................. 4-50Introduction............................................................................... 8-1iTEVA Control Center ............................................................... 2-3iTEVA Security Login Process ............................................... 8-8ITEVA Security Login ............................................................... 1-5iTEVA Security .......................................................................... 1-3iTEVA Security ........................................................................ 2-12iTEVA Security ........................................................................ 2-17iTEVA Security .......................................................................... 5-7iTEVA Security ........................................................................ 4-85iTEVA Security ........................................................................ 4-89iTEVA SQL Databases ........................................................... 2-17

Page 304: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo ScientificII iTEVA Software Manual

J, K, L, M, N, O

Manipulating Auto Sessions ................................................ 6-25Method Detection Limit......................................................... 7-11Method Menu Bar.................................................................... 4-3Method Reports...................................................................... 4-80Method....................................................................................... 4-3Method....................................................................................... 5-6Method, Audit Trail ................................................................ 4-90Method, Open ......................................................................... 4-81Method, Sign Method............................................................ 4-89New Firmware dialog box..................................................... 2-34

Opening the Program .............................................................. 1-5

P, Q, R, S

Periodic Table, Map Editor ................................................... 4-10Publisher.................................................................................... 7-3

QC Trend Chart ....................................................................... 7-12

Report Preferences ............................................................... 4-24Report Preferences, Unknowns .......................................... 4-24Report Tool Bar ......................................................................... 7-8Restore..................................................................................... 2-21Results ..................................................................................... 5-43RSD Trend Chart ..................................................................... 7-13Run Auto-Session .................................................................. 6-10Run Full Frame .......................................................................... 5-8Run.............................................................................................. 5-8Run, Unknown, QC, Standard, Blank .................................. 5-22

Sample Introduction .............................................................. 2-27Sample Options ...................................................................... 4-14Sample Report ........................................................................ 7-14Select a Method, Sign and Audit Trail ................................ 4-85Selecting Internal Standards ............................................... 4-51Sequence Automation........................................................... 4-35Sequence Menu Bar ............................................................... 6-3Sequence Tool Bar ................................................................ 6-16Sequence ................................................................................ 6-14Signing Autosessions and Autosession Audit Trail .......... 6-13 Signing Autosessions and Autosession Audit Trail .......... 8-20Signing Methods and Method Audit Trail .......................... 8-19Signing Samples and Sample Audit Trails ......................... 8-17Simple Sample Report ........................................................... 7-14Source Settings ...................................................................... 4-45Source...................................................................................... 4-14Standards ................................................................................ 4-53Status ....................................................................................... 4-12

T

The Journal ............................................................................. 2-32The Menu Bar ........................................................................... 2-4The Status Bar ........................................................................ 2-33The Tool Bar ............................................................................ 2-31The Workspace ...................................................................... 2-31Time Scan ................................................................................ 5-16To create a New Report .......................................................... 7-3Tool Bar ...................................................................................... 5-3Toolbar ..................................................................................... 4-90

Tools ......................................................................................... 4-92Tools ......................................................................................... 5-60Tools ........................................................................................... 7-7Tools, Instrument Options ..................................................... 2-27Tools, Options ........................................................................... 2-6Tools, Options, Analyst .......................................................... 2-12Tools, Options, Application Database ................................. 2-18Tools, Options, Directories ................................................... 2-10Tools, Options, General ........................................................... 2-7Tools, Options, Journal ............................................................ 2-8Tools, Options, New Method Parameters .......................... 2-12Tools, Options, Periodic Table ................................................ 2-7Tools, Options, Print Options ................................................ 2-11Tools/Options/Access Rights - only for iTEVA Security... 2-13Trailing Fullframe Options ..................................................... 4-18Trend Chart .............................................................................. 7-15

U, V, W, X, Y, Z

User Login and Authentication .............................................. 8-3User Login and Authentication .............................................. 8-8Users (only for iTEVA, not present for iTEVA Security) ... 2-21Vertical Table Report ............................................................. 7-15View............................................................................................ 2-6View.......................................................................................... 4-94View.......................................................................................... 5-67Viewing the current User’s Access Rights .......................... 8-7What is 21 CFR Part 11? ......................................................... 8-3

Index

Page 305: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual III

Index

Page 306: iTEVA Software Manual - Operator's Manualtools.thermofisher.com/content/sfs/manuals/8499 400 30001 iTEVA... · Thermo Scientific iTEVA Software Manual vii Figure 1-1. iTEVA login

Thermo ScientificIV iTEVA Software Manual

This page is intentionally blank.

Index